# You've come to the right place

Find help to make the most of Fluorescent themes on Shopify.

{% columns %}
{% column %}

### Help centers

{% endcolumn %}

{% column %}

<p align="right"><a href="/pages/mXDihm5LEQpiWpwuENyq" class="button secondary">Compare themes</a></p>
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}

<table data-card-size="large" data-column-title-hidden data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="image">Cover image</th><th data-hidden align="center"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><h3><mark style="color:$primary;">Section Studio App</mark></h3></td><td></td><td align="center"></td><td><a href="/spaces/wW8WoofsfSzp49h7DuLl">/spaces/wW8WoofsfSzp49h7DuLl</a></td><td><a href="/files/FcbzabBzYbcyypulTRYG">/files/FcbzabBzYbcyypulTRYG</a></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td><h3><mark style="color:$primary;">Eclipse</mark></h3></td><td><em>Ripple, Coastal</em></td><td align="center"></td><td><a href="/spaces/HUe2h5JnXOGnUNdkJwav">/spaces/HUe2h5JnXOGnUNdkJwav</a></td><td><a href="/files/YsHrPUObYurGNkNtpAxO">/files/YsHrPUObYurGNkNtpAxO</a></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td><h3><mark style="color:$primary;">Stiletto</mark></h3></td><td><em>Tapestry, Glimmer, Linen, Luster</em></td><td align="center"><h3>Stilett<strong>o</strong></h3></td><td><a href="/spaces/hnqe0uck0ozZhJ77wGXt">/spaces/hnqe0uck0ozZhJ77wGXt</a></td><td><a href="/files/HKFJVYFKLg53mLPA7a5f">/files/HKFJVYFKLg53mLPA7a5f</a></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td><h3><mark style="color:$primary;">Cornerstone</mark></h3></td><td><em>Barista, Botanical, Glow, Origami</em></td><td align="center"><h3></h3></td><td><a href="/spaces/yt3Wwaqhge0XvrXmVj7D">/spaces/yt3Wwaqhge0XvrXmVj7D</a></td><td><a href="/files/Qj4vdoucLKTN2yzeEyPh">/files/Qj4vdoucLKTN2yzeEyPh</a></td><td align="center"><h4>Cornerstone</h4></td></tr><tr><td><h3><mark style="color:$primary;">Lorenza</mark></h3></td><td><em>Suede, Tincture</em></td><td align="center"><h3>Lorenza</h3></td><td><a href="/spaces/l6iv1HA2gJCuwR5V6stX">/spaces/l6iv1HA2gJCuwR5V6stX</a></td><td><a href="/files/3Evde2j5bPATcWh6uiev">/files/3Evde2j5bPATcWh6uiev</a></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td><h3><mark style="color:$primary;">Spark</mark></h3></td><td><em>Foundation, Trendsetter</em></td><td align="center"><h3>Spark</h3></td><td><a href="/spaces/3iiuvh8UrcOxEOQkY2iO">/spaces/3iiuvh8UrcOxEOQkY2iO</a></td><td><a href="/files/UrnBKjEtSXKOTytvr8mX">/files/UrnBKjEtSXKOTytvr8mX</a></td><td align="center"></td></tr></tbody></table>

<details>

<summary><strong>Did you buy your theme before 2022?</strong> </summary>

You may have a *legacy* or *vintage* theme, built before "Online Store 2.0" (OS2). You may need to upgrade for support.\
\
[Visit legacy theme help center](https://fluorescent.gitbook.io/legacy-themes/)

</details>

<details>

<summary><strong>Are you using Ira or Context?</strong></summary>

These themes are no longer sold or supported. You can still find the archived documentation.

[Ira help center](https://help.fluorescent.co/v/ira) | [Context help center](https://help.fluorescent.co/v/context)

</details>

### Request features

Join our community by making feature requests. Popular requests will be considered for future theme updates.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Eclipse</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://eclipse-theme.nolt.io/">https://eclipse-theme.nolt.io/</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Stiletto</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://stiletto-theme.nolt.io/">https://stiletto-theme.nolt.io/</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Cornerstone</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://cornerstone-theme.nolt.io/">https://cornerstone-theme.nolt.io/</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Lorenza</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://lorenza-theme.nolt.io/">https://lorenza-theme.nolt.io/</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Spark</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://spark-theme.nolt.io/">https://spark-theme.nolt.io/</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

***

### Get support

{% columns %}
{% column %}
We're here to help. Our Support team is available **Monday to Friday, 10AM to 6PM PST** (excluding statutory holidays).
{% endcolumn %}

{% column %} <a href="https://fluorescent.co/contact" class="button primary">Contact us</a>

{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}


# Theme Comparison

All [Fluorescent themes](https://themes.shopify.com/designers/fluorescent) offer their own unique styles, settings, and features so you can find the perfect match for your brand and store.

See the full list of available features below or view our theme demos to see them in action:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Eclipse</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse">https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Cornerstone</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://themes.shopify.com/themes/cornerstone">https://themes.shopify.com/themes/cornerstone</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Stiletto</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://themes.shopify.com/themes/stiletto">https://themes.shopify.com/themes/stiletto</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Spark</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://themes.shopify.com/themes/spark">https://themes.shopify.com/themes/spark</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Lorenza</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://themes.shopify.com/themes/lorenza">https://themes.shopify.com/themes/lorenza</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Header

***

The **Header** appears at the top of every page. All themes include options to configure header styles, navigation menus, and search, in addition to specialized features.

### Announcement bar

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="186.0795440673828">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="130.35296630859375" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Announcement bar</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Info popup</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>     Sticky bar</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>     Scrolling style</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Layout and styles

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="184.79254150390625">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="130.20001220703125" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Drawer menu</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Featured link</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Impact logo</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Language selector</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Layout options</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Mega menu</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  with promos</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Collection images</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Mobile menu images</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Secondary menu</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Social icons</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Sticky header</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Transparent header</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Predictive search

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="184.79830932617188">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="130.63067626953125" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Quick search</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Product type filter</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Promoted (Quick) links</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Suggested terms</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Sections

***

All themes offer a unique set of **Sections** to design rich promotional content and a great shopping experience for all your pages.

### Marketing sections

Use text, images, and video to tell the story of your brand and products.

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="184.35794067382812">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="130.2755126953125" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Blog posts</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Collapsible rows (Q&#x26;A)</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Contact form</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Featured (Quick) links</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Gallery</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Gallery carousel</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Grid (Mosaic)</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Icons with text columns</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Image compare</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Image hero</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Image hero split</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Image with features</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Image with text</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Image with text split</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Inline features</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Logolist</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Map</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Multi-column</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Newsletter</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Newsletter (compact)</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Quotes</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Rich text</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Scrolling content</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Slideshow</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Slideshow split</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Social proof</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Testimonials</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Text columns w/ images</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Video</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Video hero</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Video with content</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Video with content split</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Merchandising sections

Showcase your products and collections to get customers shopping.

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="185.0823974609375">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="130.332763671875" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Collections list buttons</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Collections list grid</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Collections list slider</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Feat. collection with media</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Feat. collection grid</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Feat. collection slider</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Featured product</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Recently viewed products</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Shoppable image (hot spots)</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Shop the look</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Shoppable feed</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Tabbed collections</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Promotional sections

Highlight sales, promotions, and events.

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="185.15341186523438">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="129.178466796875" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Countdown banner</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Countdown bar</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Events</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Promotion grid</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Promotion bar</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Promotion banner</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Quick links</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Sales banner</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Collection page

***

Every theme's **Collection page** has a customizable grid with advanced filters that makes it easy to discover your products and add them directly to your cart.

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="184.52841186523438">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="129.689208984375" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Alternate templates</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Banner image</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Filtering</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Drawer</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Filter groups</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Filter search</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Sidebar</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Price range</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Swatches and Chips</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Sticky filter bar</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Pagination</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Click to load</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Infinite</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Paginated</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Product card swatches</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Product layout</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Grid</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  List</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  2-Column mobile</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Promotion block</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Quick shop</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Custom template</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Secondary image (hover)</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Product badges</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Sale + Sold-out badge</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Custom badges</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Product page

***

Every theme's **Product page** includes comprehensive settings and features like **Recommend products**, **Dynamic checkout**, and **Color swatches**. Each theme provides their own unique layout, styles, and additional features.

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="184.98297119140625">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="130.40264892578125" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Alternate templates</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Blocks</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Border</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Collapsible rows</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Complementary products</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Custom option</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Customer support</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Image</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Image with text</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Information popup</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Payment and trust</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Shipping estimator</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Icons with text</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Text block</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Text list with icons</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Text with video</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Breadcrumbs</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Custom Liquid</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Dynamic checkout button</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Gift card recipient form</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Layout options</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Full width</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Column (List)</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Grid</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Media gallery size</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Thumbnail position</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Local pickup banner</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Media grouping</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Product image zoom</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Product tabs</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Rating stars</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Recommended products sidebar</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Recently viewed products</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Recommended products</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Sibling product swatches</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Social share icons</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Sticky add-to-cart</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Stock level indicator</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Variant chips</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Custom layout</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Variant Swatches</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Custom styles</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Custom colors</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Dynamic option availability</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Page templates

***

All themes provide **Templates** for every default page type and supports multiple templates for products, collections, pages, and blogs. Some themes have additional specially-designed templates:

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="184.82669067382812">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="130.51666259765625" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>About</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Blog pages</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Blog posts</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Contact</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>FAQ</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Events</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Guide</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Lookbook</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Password</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Search page</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Locations</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Image settings

***

All themes include advanced **Image settings** that give you control over the size, shape, focus, and style of your images. These settings are available on either most or select sections and pages.

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="184.4573974609375">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="129.79595947265625" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Aspect ratio</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Color overlay (tint)</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Corner rounding</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Custom height</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Custom width</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Focal point</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Gradient overlay</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Media fit</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Mobile-specific images</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Animation</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Cart

***

All themes provide settings for the **Cart** page and **Quick Cart** with some offering additional features.

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="184.721435546875">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="130.39202880859375" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Automatic cart updates</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Cart notes</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Cross sells</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Free shipping bar</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Low inventory warning</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Quick cart</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Empty cart promotion</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Recently viewed products</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Popup

***

Every theme includes a customizable **Popup** that automatically displays a newsletter signup to keep customers engaged.

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="184.362548828125">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="129.96087646484375" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Popup</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Age verification</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Countdown</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Promo</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Sign up</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Behavior settings</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>Sticky tab</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Footer

***

The **Footer** appears at the bottom of every page. All themes offer features to help customers continue shopping, learn more about your store, and keep in touch.

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="185.21023559570312">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="130.227294921875" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Content blocks</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Text</td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Text with image</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"></td><td align="center"></td></tr><tr><td>  Links</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>  Newsletter</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Country selector</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Language selector</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Payment icons</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Social icons</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Theme code

***

Most themes include standalone files for CSS and JS customizations, as well as the original unminified Theme JS file that can be enabled.

<table data-full-width="true"><thead><tr><th width="184.91192626953125">Feature</th><th align="center">Eclipse</th><th width="137.522705078125" align="center">Cornerstone</th><th align="center">Stiletto</th><th align="center">Lorenza</th><th align="center">Spark</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Custom CSS</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Custom JS events</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr><tr><td>Theme JS (unminified)</td><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:green;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:red;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:purple;">■</mark></td><td align="center"><mark style="color:yellow;">■</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Get started

Install your free trial of Eclipse and start customizing your storefront. When you're ready, purchase your copy and hit publish!

{% stepper %}
{% step %}

#### Choose theme preset

Choose from 4 presets with ready-made layouts and styles.

All presets include the same features and settings. The demos provide just a few examples — you can customize Eclipse to create storefronts as unique as your business.

<div><figure><img src="/files/V4nVAr04h7TFUpsEdzwO" alt=""><figcaption><p><a href="https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse/presets/eclipse">Eclipse</a></p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/stzf6GDZlf2FMGTuNvEq" alt=""><figcaption><p><a href="https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse/presets/ripple">Ripple</a></p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/xYmFsP1TdKM0Vf8kEKG2" alt=""><figcaption><p><a href="https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse/presets/coastal">Coastal</a></p></figcaption></figure></div>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

#### Start free trial

Try Eclipse as long as you like before deciding to purchase. Click **Try theme** on the theme preset listing.

In your **Theme library**, click **Customize** to open the theme editor. All your changes will be saved when you buy the theme.
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

#### Buy and publish

hen you're ready to publish, go to your theme library and click **Buy** on your theme trial version. You can only [publish themes](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/managing-themes/publishing-themes) to your online store that you've purchased.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Licensed themes are purchased exclusively through the Shopify Theme Store.** Unlicensed themes are not supported. If you downloaded the theme from another vendor or plan to use the theme on another store, you need to take immediate action to purchase a legal licensed version.

[Learn more](/eclipse/get-started/theme-license)
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Upgrading from an another theme?</strong></td><td>Read our <a href="/pages/PVrA3sKckBPHZzGEXFsJ">theme migration guide</a> for advice on how to transfer your content.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Migrating to Eclipse

Moving from one theme to another might feel like starting from scratch, but it doesn't have to! We'll cover what you need to know about changing themes, and how you can approach setting up your theme to make it more efficient.

## What do I need to transfer?

***

Content and settings that were set up in the theme editor cannot be transferred automatically. You will need to set up sections for each template and apply new theme settings.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>What you need to set up</strong></td><td><ul><li>Theme settings</li><li>Templates</li><li>Sections</li><li>Custom code</li><li>Apps</li><li>Dynamic sources</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><strong>What you DON'T need to transfer</strong></td><td><ul><li>Products</li><li>Collections</li><li>Pages</li><li>Blog posts</li><li>Files</li><li>Metafields</li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Before you start

***

To get started, open the editor for both the old and new theme.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Open both theme editors</strong></td><td>Open your old and new theme in two separate windows side-by-side.</td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Use preview inspector</strong></td><td>Enable the inspector to easily select, edit, and add sections. You can also move, duplicate, and hide sections. <a href="https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/edit#preview-inspector">Learn more</a>.</td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up Eclipse

***

To make setting up your theme easier, start by just adding sections and content before focusing on specific settings and styles.

We recommend following the order below to set up your theme:

{% stepper %}
{% step %}

#### [Add sections](#add-sections-1)

Set up each section and copy over any text, images, and videos. Start with the home page, then set up other templates.
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

#### [Edit theme styles](#edit-theme-styles-1)

Apply global styles and options to your theme, including fonts and colors.
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

#### [Edit section styles](#edit-ection-styles)

Return to your new sections and customize their settings and styles.
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

#### [Set up apps and custom code](#set-up-apps)

You may need to re-add apps and app blocks and manually transfer any custom code. It's good to keep this as the last step to properly test any customizations.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Add sections

***

Add and rearrange the section you want to use. You can check out the full list of [Eclipse's theme sections](/eclipse/sections/overview).

We recommend **hiding sections instead of deleting them**. Not only will this be faster but you can avoid making mistakes that you can't undo.

### Add text

***

With your two windows side-by-side, select and copy text from your previous theme and paste theme into the corresponding fields.

{% hint style="info" %} <mark style="color:blue;">**Can't find where to add content?**</mark>

* There might be a similar field with a different name. For example, there may be a "subheading" instead of "text".
* Click **(+) Add block** to find additional content blocks. For example, some sections have "heading" and "text" blocks.
  {% endhint %}

### Add images and videos

***

Any images that you've uploaded to your old theme will still be in your Shopify files. Click **(+) Add image**, you can find them all in the media library.

{% columns %}
{% column %}
{% hint style="info" %} <mark style="color:blue;">**Tip**</mark>**&#x20;— Search file names**

You can copy the name of the image or video file from your old theme and paste it into the search bar.\
\
This will save you time from scrolling through your entire media library.
{% endhint %}
{% endcolumn %}

{% column %}

<figure><img src="/files/wvfIbgLkdHNVDg6WWQSd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}

## Edit theme styles

***

After adding your content, you can apply global styles, such as colors and fonts, then follow up by fine-tuning styles for individual sections.

Go to **Theme settings** in your theme editors. You can select a preset theme style, or set up your own custom branding, including colors and fonts.

You will also find additional settings for products, the cart, and more. You can find a full overview in the [theme settings guide](#theme-settings).

#### Quick tips

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><p><strong>Colors</strong></p><p>To speed things along, click on the color swatches and copy the hexcode to paste into the new theme's settings.</p></td></tr><tr><td><p><strong>Fonts</strong></p><p>All themes support Shopify's native font library. If you have custom fonts, see our <a href="/pages/Zk7B2ABe3eVyvk5BFM8I">Custom fonts guide</a>.</p></td></tr><tr><td><p><strong>Swatches</strong></p><p>Aadd the option names you were using for swatches and chips. Any custom swatch images will still be in your Shopify files. You can also add <a href="/pages/ALVNL4S01oGsET5sN0Gp">custom colors</a>.</p></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Edit section styles

***

After customizing the theme settings, go back to your updated page templates to customize your sections. You can find a full list and set up instructions in the [Theme sections guide](/eclipse/sections/overview).

## Set up apps

***

You may need to re-add **apps and app blocks** in the theme editor. Be sure to explore all theme features to see if what you want is already included in Eclipse.

Our support cannot cover app integration or fixing issues arising from apps. Please contact the app developer for help.

## Configure custom code

***

{% hint style="warning" %}
When setting up your theme, make a duplicate copy as a backup to test any custom code changes.
{% endhint %}

If your previous theme has **code customizations**, they need to be manually transferred to the new theme. Custom code is often theme-specific and may not work by pasting code as-is.

Our support cannot cover custom code or issues arising from customizations. If you need help from a developer, we recommend reaching out to a [verified Fluorescent partner](https://partners.fluorescent.co).

* If you're familiar with adding code, you can use [Custom CSS in the theme editor](/eclipse/advanced/custom-css). It's more stable and you don't need to manually transfer it for theme updates.

## Explore new features

***

Check out the sidebar or use the search to find features that are unique to Eclipse. You may want to start with [Sections](/eclipse/sections/overview), [Theme settings](/eclipse/theme-settings/theme-settings), [Product pages](/eclipse/product-pages/product-template), and [Collection pages](/eclipse/collections/collection-page).

{% hint style="info" %}
Check out Eclipse's store demos for inspiration: [*Eclipse*](https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse/presets/eclipse)*,* [*Ripple*](https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse/presets/ripple)*, and* [*Coastal*](https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse/presets/coastal)
{% endhint %}


# Theme license

To have a valid license, your theme must be purchased through the Shopify Theme Store. Theme licenses are valid only for the single store that it was purchased for.

You may have an unlicensed theme if you bought a copy outside of the Shopify Theme Store or are re-using a theme copy for multiple stores.

<details>

<summary>Do I need to purchase a new copy for multiple stores?</summary>

Yes, theme licenses are valid only for the store it was purchased for. You must purchase the theme again through the Shopify Theme Store. If you're opening a new store to replace your old store, you can learn about [transferring your theme license](#transferring-theme-licenses).

</details>

## What if I have an unlicensed theme?

Unlicensed themes are ineligible for support and updates, and it can put your store at risk of removal by Shopify.

{% hint style="warning" %}
Continued use of an unlicensed version may lead to a Digital Millennium Copyright Act (DMCA) takedown notice with Shopify, resulting in your store being taken offline.
{% endhint %}

### How to license your theme

We understand you may be unaware that you have a unlicensed copy, and we want you to be able to continue using Eclipse and gain access to support and future updates.

You will need take immediate action, as according to Shopify's Terms of Services:

> **Purchase**: Consider buying the theme for the store where you plan to use it.
>
> **Delete**: If you choose not to purchase the theme, then you must remove it from your theme library.
>
> **Transfer**: In cases where you previously purchased a theme for an old store but no longer use it there, you might be able to transfer it to your new store.

## Transferring theme licenses

If you wish to transfer your theme license to a new store, you need to re-purchase the theme for the active store and remove it from the original store. Please [contact us regarding re-purchasing the theme](https://fluorescent.co/help/contact/).

> You may also review [Shopify's requirements for transferring a theme](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/unlicensed-themes#requirements-for-transferring-a-theme).

## Get a theme license for Eclipse

Go to the Shopify Theme Store to [purchase a licensed version of Eclipse](https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse/styles/journey). Upon purchase, you will have access to support and ongoing updates.


# FAQs

### Quick start

***

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Migrate your theme content to Eclipse</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/PVrA3sKckBPHZzGEXFsJ">/pages/PVrA3sKckBPHZzGEXFsJ</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Customize the overall look of your store</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/yjROHs2mmLirreHMftHP">/pages/yjROHs2mmLirreHMftHP</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Design pages with templates and sections</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/eecLr0hbZan6MDE21yAk">/pages/eecLr0hbZan6MDE21yAk</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### General

***

<details>

<summary>What's the difference between theme presets?</summary>

Presets include default styles and templates based on the demos. When you install an Eclipse preset, you have access to all the same sections and features. You can recreate any feature or page found in the demos. Presets provide a starting point for customizing your store.

</details>

<details>

<summary>Why aren't changes in the editor showing on my site?</summary>

You may need to assign the template you are editing to your pages in the Shopify admin. See our guide for creating and assigning templates. If your theme isn't published yet, learn how to assign templates from unpublished themes.

It's also possible you have edited a 'Context' for a specific market, so the changes will only appear when visiting your site from certain countries. See our guide for [Editing contexts for markets](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/unique-content-for-markets).

</details>

<details>

<summary>Does Eclipse support multiple languages?</summary>

Yes. Eclipse includes a language selector in the Header and Footer. You will need to use an app (like Shopify’s [Translate & Adapt](https://https/apps.shopify.com/translate-and-adapt/)) to translate your store content, and you may need to take some extra steps when setting up theme features. Learn more in our guide for [selling in multiple languages](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/multiple-languages).

</details>

<details>

<summary>Will you help customize my store?</summary>

While our Support cannot offer code customizations, we can point you to a service that does. Just let us know what you're looking for — we might even have a solution for you with our available theme features.

</details>

<details>

<summary>Do you provide refunds?</summary>

All theme sales are final and we are unable to provide refunds. As theme developers, we are not involved in billing or transactions through the Shopify theme store. Refund request need to be addressed to [Shopify’s billing team](https://https/help.shopify.com/en/support/support-type/).

</details>

### Theme features

***

<details>

<summary>How do I set up mega navigations?</summary>

Create a nested menu in the Shopify admin, then add a mega menu block to the header. See the full [mega menu guide](/eclipse/header/header/mega-menu) to learn more.

</details>

<details>

<summary>How do I add a size guide?</summary>

You can use the [variant popup link](/eclipse/product-pages/variant-options/info-popup) or [popup block](/eclipse/product-pages/product-content-blocks/popup-block) to add size guides or any other product guide with additional details for your customers.

</details>

<details>

<summary>Can I add custom fonts?</summary>

Before deciding to use a custom font, we highly recommend considering one of the hundreds of fonts in [Shopify's Font Picker](https://shopify.dev/themes/architecture/settings/fonts#third-party-hosted-fonts) as your first choice, since they are fully supported by all our themes.\
\
If you're familiar with HTML and CSS, or have a developer, it's possible to add fonts using Custom CSS. Please note the we cannot support custom code or related issues.

</details>

<details>

<summary>How do I remove the ‘Shipping’ and ‘Taxes’ messages?</summary>

Depending your store settings, default text for Shipping and Taxes appears on Cart and Product pages. Follow our guide for [Editing default theme content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/edit-default-theme-content) to change or remove this text.

</details>

### Troubleshooting

***

<details>

<summary>Why are my swatches blank?</summary>

If your swatches appear blank, make sure that you are using an existing default color or that your image files and custom color names much your variant names. You may also need to add custom swatches for multiple languages.

</details>

<details>

<summary>Why is the mega nav not working in other languages?</summary>

If you've translated your store using an app, make sure the "Parent dropdown link" name is not translated, as this will break the mega nav. See instructions below for fixing translated mega navigations.

</details>

<details>

<summary>How do I find the H1 heading tags?</summary>

H1 headings are generated from page titles or the store name, following Shopify's recommended SEO structure. Page titles can be edited in your Shopify admin.

If you have concerns about H1 tags in your theme, see our H1 heading tags guide for answers to common questions.

</details>


# Changelog

{% hint style="info" %}
To access the latest features and fixes, you must [update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) in the Shopify admin.
{% endhint %}

Eclipse was first released November 15, 2024. All theme versions are built for Shopify's latest [theme architecture](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/managing-themes/versions#features) ("Online Store 2.0").

## 5.3.1 — Latest release

*August 4, 2026*

> Eclipse v5.3.1 brings updated favicon support and fixes a handful of issues.
>
> ### Fixes and other improvements
>
> * Extended favicon support for larger standard sizes (up to 48px) and iOS icon sizes (up to 180px). To take advantage of this size increase, please ensure the Theme settings > Favicon image is at least 180px.
> * Fixed the collection template header content not aligning correctly on mobile.
> * Fixed the filter drawers and sort menus not fully applying their color schemes.
> * Fixed the Slideshow video slides sometimes pausing when changing slides quickly.
> * Fixed the Free shipping bar not updating on the cart template when updating the products.
> * Fixed the Contact form's select dropdown not always using the correct colours for the label and icon.

## 5.3.0

*July 9, 2026*

> Eclipse v5.3.0 updates the theme to use Shopify's new customer account component.
>
> ### Added
>
> * With legacy customer accounts being deprecated, we've added the option to choose whether the new account component is used, or if customer account links just link directly to their associated page.
>
> ### Removed
>
> * The legacy customer account templates.
>
> ### Fixes and other improvements
>
> * Fixed multi-line menus in the Header not aligning correctly.

## 5.2.1

*May 5, 2026*

> Eclipse v5.2.1 adds the ability to create custom product badges, and gives more control over badge displays.
>
> #### Added
>
> * The option to create custom product badges under "Theme settings > Product badges", along with the ability to customize the background and text color for "Sale" and "Sold out" badges. These can be included with:
>   * Product listings under "Theme settings > Product listings"
>   * Product templates through the "Price" and "Badges" blocks
> * A dedicated "Badges" block to product templates.

## 5.2.0

*March 4, 2026*

> Eclipse v5.2.0 adds a new section.
>
> #### Added
>
> * A new "Quotes" section to showcase reviews and testimonials.

## 5.1.3

*February 9, 2026*

> Eclipse v5.1.3 adds support for app-triggered cart updates.
>
> #### Added
>
> * Support for a JS event that app developers can use to trigger cart updates.

## 5.1.2

*December 2, 2025*

> Eclipse v5.1.2 adds a new preset and fixes a few minor bugs.
>
> #### Added
>
> * A new preset called "Purse".
>
> #### Fixes and other improvements
>
> * Fixed the product media and thumbnails sometimes not working correctly in the quick shopping modal.
> * Fixed the product item quick shopping button not being responsive on mobile in some sections.
> * Fixed some issues with header navigation touch interaction on larger screens.
> * Fixed sibling swatches not showing on product listings if the products have no variants.

## 5.1.1

September 16, 2025

> Eclipse v5.1.1 hotfixes a template issue which may cause hidden product media by default.
>
> **Fixes and other improvements**
>
> * Fixed some templates enabling "Media grouping" by default, sometimes causing product media to be hidden by default in the product gallery.

## 5.1.0

*September 3, 2025*

> Eclipse v5.1.0 adds some new fields to the newsletter signup forms, along with an important fix to the quick shopping experience in some sections.\\
>
> **Added**
>
> * First and last name fields for newsletter signup forms.\\
>
> **Fixes and other improvements**
>
> * Fixed there being horizontal overflow, when there are mega menus set up, for browsers that always show scrollbars.
> * Fixed the "Background" setting for "Outline button" in color schemes getting the setting's default value (#000000) when it's meant to be transparent.
>   * We originally specified this setting to have no value (which used to be the equivalent of transparent), but this results in the default value being used now, so we've switched to specifying an actual transparent value.
> * Updated the mobile quick view reveal animation.
> * Fixed the max value of price range filters rounding down to the nearest dollar.
> * Fixed quick shopping buttons not showing (or not showing correctly) on product cards for cart cross-sell items, the "Shop the look" and "Shoppable feed" sections, and complementary product items.

## 5.0.3

*August 10, 2025*

> Eclipse v5.0.3 fixes an issue with color schemes in the theme editor.
>
> **Fixes and other improvements**
>
> * Fixed the "Background gradient" setting always getting a value applied, even if you've removed it.
>   * We supplied a default value for this setting and then specifically set it to not have a value for certain color schemes because we weren't aware that Shopify would use the default value if the setting value was ever blank (whether it started blank, or was edited to be blank).

## 5.0.2

*July 17, 2025*

> Eclipse v5.0.2 adds new social media icons and a few small improvements, as well as fixes some minor bugs.
>
> **Added**
>
> * New [social media icons](/eclipse/theme-settings/theme-settings/social-media) for Houzz, Line, RedNote, WeChat, and Discord.
>
> **Changed**
>
> * Updated the unbranded dynamic checkout button to use the 'Accent' color for its background.
> * Updated the mobile quick shopping button on product cards to use a different icon for products with variants when the type is "Quick add". This is to make it more clear that a quick view modal will open to choose variants, rather directly adding to the cart.
>
> **Removed**
>
> * The sticky Add to Cart's "Change" button when product has only a single variant.
>
> **Fixes and other improvements**
>
> * Fixed the hover animation for items in the "Shoppable feed" section not being as smooth as intended.
> * Updated the "Shop now link action" setting label and options of the "Shoppable feed" section to better match the functionality.
> * Fixed the quick shopping display not being correct on page load for complementary product items on the product page when there are no other sections or blocks that contain product cards.
> * Fixed swatch images persisting to subsequent swatches that don't have their own image.
> * Fixed the mobile menu not working correctly when reduced motion is enabled on a device.
> * Fixed the image width settings for the "Image, text, and socials" block of the "Footer" section not working.
> * Fixed the login modal on the password page missing some styling.

## 5.0.1

*June 19, 2025*

> Eclipse v5.0.1 fixes some broken templates from the folder restructure.

## 5.0.0

*June 17, 2025*

> Eclipse v5.0.0 reconfigures the theme folder structure to support changes for the Theme Store redesign.

## 4.0.0

*May 7, 2025*

> Eclipse v4.0.0 introduces a new 'Shoppable feed' section, as well as more nuanced section width support and optimized image rendering.
>
> **Added**
>
> * A new "Shoppable feed" section.
>
> **Fixes and other improvements**
>
> * Improved section width settings for more alignment options with a focus on larger screens.
> * Optimized responsive image sizes.

## 3.0.0

*April 2, 2025*

> Eclipse v3.0.0 introduces three new sections, corner rounding control, and expands where Quick shopping is used. It also includes a wide range of fixes and improvements.
>
> **Added**
>
> * ["Icon with text columns" section](/eclipse/sections/icon-with-text-columns)
> * ["Shop the look" section](/eclipse/sections/shop-the-look)
> * ["Grid" section](/eclipse/sections/grid)
> * The option to control [corner rounding](/eclipse/theme-settings/corner-rounding) throughout the theme.
> * "Ripple" preset
>
> **Changed**
>
> * Connected Quick shopping to small product cards like Complementary products and Cross sells.
>
> **Fixes and other improvements**
>
> * Fixed the content width setting not applying properly for banners (eg. "Collection banner", "Image hero", etc.).
> * Fixed spacing below "Heading" blocks sometimes being too large.
> * Fixed the cart note displaying incorrectly in Chrome browsers.
> * Fixed longer blog post titles possibly being cut off on the "Blog" template.
> * Fixed the article title not bleeding through the hover image in the "Blog posts" section sidebar.
> * Improved header loading transitions.
> * Fixed incorrect non-english translation strings on the contact form.
> * Fixed an issue with Mega menu promo images not being visible if the menu was opened very quickly after page load.
> * Fixed the customer order table not correctly wrapping product details on medium sized screens.
> * Fixed display of sales price total on customer order table on mobile screens.
> * Fixed the price displays and error messages for products within Complementary products and Cross sells.

## 2.0.0

*February 11, 2025*

> Eclipse v2.0.0 introduces a new "Featured links" section and a Sticky buy button within the product page. It also covers a wide range of improvements and fixes.\\
>
> **Added**
>
> * [Sticky add to cart](/eclipse/product-pages/sticky-add-to-cart) feature within the Buy button block of the Product page.
> * New ["Featured links" section](/eclipse/sections/featured-links).
>
> **Changed**
>
> * The quick shopping dialog will now respect the order of blocks as configured on the product page.
>
> **Removed**
>
> * Removed balanced text wrapping as the default for heading elements (eg. H1, H2, etc.). This now only applies to section headers.
>
> **Fixes and other improvements**
>
> * Fixed quick shopping functionality not working on recommended products when there are no other sections with product cards on the page.
> * Fixed navigation dropdown hover styles not displaying correctly when the header color scheme has a dark background.
> * Fixed Image and Video hero sections to include text with existing heading animations.
> * Fixed the right column of the product page, on desktop, extending beyond the page width when there's a "Complementary products" block with more than 3 products.
> * Fixed the "Color scheme" setting not working in the "Featured product" section.
> * Included opening and closing animations for modals like Quick view and the Product page's popup links.
> * Fixed sibling swatches on product cards missing spaces between words in option name.
> * Fixed text in headings being clipped for some fonts.
> * Fixed heading elements (H1-H6) not using the heading font in article and page content.
> * Fixed long option names sometimes being cut off inside variant chips.
> * Fixed the product page scrolling the media display into view on variant change for some configurations on mobile.
> * Fixed an issue where header menus or scrolling on load could cause unintentional horizontal scrollbars on the page.
> * Fixed the header logo not sizing correctly for some SVGs.

## 1.2.1

*December 23, 2024*

> Eclipse v1.2.1 fixes issues with color schemes in the quick shopping dialog and an issue with videos not being rounded.
>
> **Fixes and improvements**
>
> * Fixed an issue with video media not being rounded that was introduced in v1.2.0.
> * Fixed an issue with the quick shopping dialog buy buttons not respecting a custom background color.
> * Fixed an issue with the quick shopping dialog content incorrectly showing the product page background color.

## 1.2.0

*December 17, 2024*

> Eclipse v1.2.0 brings a handful of new sections to the theme, storefront translations for several EU languages, and a range of improvements and fixes.
>
> **Added**
>
> * Added [Featured product](/eclipse/sections/feature-product) section.
> * Added [Scrolling content](/eclipse/sections/scrolling-content) section.
> * Added [Video with text](/eclipse/sections/video-with-text) section.
> * Added [Image hero](/eclipse/sections/image-hero) and [Video hero](/eclipse/sections/video-hero) sections.
> * Added the option for [quick shoppin](/eclipse/products/product-listings/quick-shopping)g purchase flows, such as "Quick add" and "Quick view".
> * Added storefront translations for German, Spanish, French, and Italian languages.
>
> **Changed**
>
> * Updated preset fonts to account for recent deprecated fonts.
>
> **Fixes and improvements**
>
> * Improved how the Header handles tablet-sized screens when language and/or country selectors are enabled.
> * Improved the clarity of swatch images in both the product listings and the product templates.
> * Improved the stability of the product template while thumbnails and images are loading in.
> * Applied a better loading state to product thumbnails on the product template.
> * Changed default Sticky effect on product page from "Gallery" to "Product details" for better usability.
> * Fixed the size range for product listing swatches being too large. The featured image deserves some space too.
> * Fixed header menu items not showing when the header is transparent and a mega menu is open.
> * Fixed an issue where product media could load incorrectly sized images. We've asked it to stop.
> * Fixed an issue on Apple WebKit browsers (eg. Safari v16) where animated headings and text would render extremely small. No one has eyes that good.
> * Fixed an issue on Apple WebKit browsers (eg. Safari v18) where animated headings and text would jitter when the page was scrolled.
> * Fixed some blocks on the Password template not respecting the animation settings.

## 1.1.2

*December 10, 2024*

> Eclipse v1.1.2 brings key fixes to dropdowns and some mobile sliders.<br>
>
> **Fixes and improvements**
>
> * Fixed "Sort by" dropdown rendering off-screen on desktop Chrome browsers.
> * Fixed the multi-column section sometimes not appearing on iOS devices when the mobile slider is disabled.
> * Improved positioning of localization dropdowns in the header and footer.

## 1.1.1

*November 26, 2024*

> Eclipse v1.1.1 fixes a visual bug in the Collection filter drawer.\\
>
> **Fixes and improvements**
>
> * Fixed filter labels sometimes not using the available space in the filter drawer.

## 1.1.0

*November 25, 2024*

> Eclipse v1.1.0 adds a few product page blocks and fixes some minor bugs.
>
> **Added**
>
> * A "Product rating" block to the product template.
> * An "Inventory levels" block to the product template.
> * A "Custom option" block to the product template.
>
> **Fixes and other improvements**
>
> * Fixed header menu items not showing when the header is transparent and a mega menu is open.
> * Fixed an issue with the product template where removing the pickup availability drawer would break the product form.
> * Fixed the product rating showing too many decimal places. Turns out you can be too precise.
> * Fixed the mobile menu behaving unexpectedly when two links share the same name.
> * Fixed the language and country selectors in the mobile menu not being able to scroll to the bottom of the list.
> * Fixed accordions (eg. "Collapsible row" blocks, "Collapsible content" sections, filter drawer groups, etc.) not aligning properly in Chrome.
> * Fixed the content width setting of the "Image with text" section not applying correctly.
> * Fixed the "Custom width" setting not working for the "Impact logo" section.

## 1.0.0

*November 15, 2024*

> The official launch of Eclipse.


# Update your theme

We regularly update Eclipse with changes and improvements. Update your theme version to gain access to new features and ensure better stability and support.

You will be notified of all theme updates in your **Theme library**. Click the notification to view the update details.

* Click **View release notes** to learn more about the update.
* Click **Add to theme library** to add an unpublished copy.

{% columns %}
{% column %}
**Automated updates**

Themes automatically update for minor fixes or security issues. Any customizations made using the theme editor will be included. [Learn more](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/managing-themes/updating-themes)
{% endcolumn %}

{% column %}
**Manual update required**

If you or an app has made any custom code changes, you will need to manually transfer theme files.
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}

{% hint style="info" %}
Our Support cannot cover manual theme updates, code customizations, or app integration.
{% endhint %}

## Manually updating your theme

***

If your theme does not automatically update, or if there are any code changes made to your theme copy, you will need to copy any updated files from your current copy to the new theme version.

The following guide shows how to transfer your theme settings and templates faster and efficiently.

### Step 1: Add updated theme version

***

First, you will need to add the latest theme version before transferring your settings and templates.

In your **Shopify Admin**:

1. Click **Add to theme library** to add the updated version of the theme to your theme library. The updated theme copy will have the theme name prefixed with "Updated copy of".
2. If there's no **Add to theme library** button, you may need to install a fresh copy of Eclipse from the theme store.

{% hint style="info" %}

#### Recommended

Add a duplicate copy of your current theme as a backup. You can rename theme copies to keep track of different versions.
{% endhint %}

### Step 2: Open code editors for both themes

***

Open the code editors for each theme copy in separate windows. This will make it easier to copy and paste code to the new theme version.

<figure><img src="/files/rJhuJTfRD54sE0BWoKQq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Step 3: Open theme files

***

Get ready to transfer your code by opening theme files for both the current and new theme version. You will need to open files for theme settings, templates, section groups, and other files with custom code.

**Note**: This includes files that have been created for [customized Contexts](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/store-contextualization).

<div><figure><img src="/files/7sszsSo9FWnJu8qzb1Tw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/LXGCTj01piMiUBaiSin7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

First open files in the old theme version, then repeat these steps for the new version.

1. Open the **Templates** folder.
2. Click every **`.json`** file in the order they appear to open them in their own tab.
3. In the **Sections** folder, open files for the header, footer, and overlay sections.

   > * **`header-group.json`**
   > * **`footer-group.json`**
   > * **`overlay-group.json`**

   > You will also need to open any files created for [custom Contexts](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/store-contextualization). For example:
   >
   > * **`header-group.context.eu.json`**
   > * **`footer-group.context.ca.json`**
4. In the **Config** folder, click to open the **`settings_data.json`**. This file contains the theme's global settings.

</details>

### Step 4: Add missing templates or files

***

If there are files that are in the old theme that don't exist in the new theme, you will need to add files with the exact same name.

**Note**: This includes files that have been created for [customized Contexts](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/store-contextualization).

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

For templates or files that don't already exist in the new theme, you need to create them in the code editor.

1. Click the **Templates** folder or other folder.
2. Click the **Add file** button.
3. Enter the exact same name as the file in the old theme, including the file type. Eg. `page.landing.json`

You now should have your theme files opened and ready for each theme version.

</details>

### Step 5: Copy old theme files into new theme files

***

We will now copy and paste your old theme files into your new theme files.

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

1. In both windows, select the first tab with the same filename (eg. **`blog.json`**)
2. In the old theme (left window), **select all** of the file contents (**`cmd+a`** or **`ctrl+a`**) and **copy** (**`cmd+c`** or **`ctrl+c`**) the contents to your clipboard.
3. In the new theme (right window), **delete** the current code, and **paste** (**`cmd+v`** or **`ctrl+v`**) everything from your old theme.
4. Click **Save** after overwriting each file.
5. Repeat this process for all open files. To keep track, you can close each tab once you've transferred and saved the new contents.
6. Click **Save**.

</details>

That's it! Well done! Now you can close the code editors, and preview the old and new themes beside each other before publishing the new theme.


# Editing themes

Learn how to use the Shopify theme editor for customizing your online store templates, sections, and styles.

The **theme editor** organizes all the elements of your online store in one place so you can easily design every page with theme templates, sections, and settings.

* Use the **editor toolbar** to undo or redo changes, save, and publish your theme.
* You can enable the **Inspector** to select, add, and move sections directly within the live preview.
* Change the size of the **preview** within your theme editor. You can choose desktop, mobile, or full screen.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Edit theme settings</strong></mark></td><td>Customize your online store’s site-wide styles and options.</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/yjROHs2mmLirreHMftHP">/pages/yjROHs2mmLirreHMftHP</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Use page templates</strong></mark></td><td>Edit default page templates or create new page templates.</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/eecLr0hbZan6MDE21yAk">/pages/eecLr0hbZan6MDE21yAk</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Add sections and blocks</strong></mark></td><td>Customize templates by adding sections and blocks in the side panel.</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Edit default theme content</strong></mark></td><td>Edit your general theme content.</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/fsUyNSSOn5CASfK9c0im">/pages/fsUyNSSOn5CASfK9c0im</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Sell in multiple languages</strong></mark></td><td>Translate your store and theme.</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/FHP7ccxn3urxeED26zYR">/pages/FHP7ccxn3urxeED26zYR</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Show unique content for different markets</strong></mark></td><td>Use Shopify's Contexts to display content based on your customer's location.</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/rCoSx6bc26MsWVgazOtL">/pages/rCoSx6bc26MsWVgazOtL</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Dynamic content with metafields

**Metafields** and **Dynamic sources** are Shopify features that allow you to store and display unique content for products, collections, blogs, and pages.

These features are perfect for displaying specific product information — such as size guides or part numbers — for different products that use the same template.

{% hint style="info" %}
This guide provides a general overview of using metafields and dynamic sources in our themes. Follow the links below for instructions for using dynamic sources for specific theme features.

* Collapsible row block
* [Information popup](/eclipse/product-pages/variant-options/info-popup#use-metafields-to-display-unique-product-guides) (Size guide)
* Complementary products
* [Sibling product swatches](/eclipse/product-pages/sibling-product-swatches)
  {% endhint %}

### Watch video tutorials

Watch the step-by-step tutorials for the Metafields. The first video provides a general introduction, and the second video shows you how to use metafields for unique size guides and complementary products.

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RxXo40eVW3c>" %}

{% embed url="<https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gxB6XDhCy80>" %}

## Overview

***

If you want to display custom content for different pages, you can use Shopify's **metafields** and **dynamic sources**.

* **Metafields** are extra data fields in your Shopify admin that can store additional information and content for products, collections, and pages.
* **Dynamic sources** are what connect metafields to templates and sections. You can add dynamic sources in your theme editor to automatically display metafield content for specific products, collections, or pages.

{% hint style="success" %}
Metafields and dynamic sources are a Shopify feature. Our themes use these features but they are controlled by Shopify. For a full overview, see [Shopify's metafields guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/metafields).
{% endhint %}

## General steps

***

Shopify's **Metafields** lets you store additional information about your products in your Shopify admin. You can create custom fields to hold different types of information.

Once your metafields are set up, you can use **Dynamic sources** in your theme editor to connect metafields to your templates. Dynamic sources automatically use the content entered in the metafield for each product.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}

#### Create metafields

Go to **Settings > Custom data** to create a metafield for a part of your store. The most common metafields are for **Products** and **Collections**.

Add a new **definition** with a **name**, then select the **type** of metafield. The type determines what kind of information the metafield will hold: e.g., text, URLs, or products.

> See Shopify's list of [Metafield content types and values](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/custom-data/metafields/metafield-definitions/metafield-types)
> {% endstep %}

{% step %}

#### Add content to metafields

The metafields that you create will appear on the admin pages of your products, collections, or other parts of your store.

You can use [Shopify's bulk editor ](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/custom-data/metafields/bulk-edit-metafields)↗ to add metafield entries for multiple products or collections.
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

#### Insert metafields as dynamic source

Now that the **Metafields** of your products have content, you can connect them to your theme to automatically show the correct information for different parts of your store.

In the theme editor, click on a block or section to open the settings. Click an **Insert dynamic source** button next to a field or setting, and select your metafield.

The setting must support the **type** of metafield: e.g., heading fields require a single-line text metafield.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}


# Edit default theme content

Learn how to use Shopify's default theme content editor to change the wording of your online store, such as shipping and taxes messages, footer text, and button labels.

Your theme may include text that cannot be changed in the theme editor. Instead, you can use the **default theme content editor** in the Shopify admin.

{% hint style="warning" %}
The default theme content editor is not available in free trial mode.
{% endhint %}

{% stepper %}
{% step %}

#### Open default theme content editor

In your theme editor, click the **Actions (**<kbd>**...**</kbd>**)** button and select **Edit default theme content**.

<figure><img src="/files/fqwMAlqjystIjEPUk1Z9" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

#### Search for default text

Use the **filter bar** to search for the text you want to change, or select a category to filter default text by different areas of your theme.
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

#### Edit or remove text

Edit the text you want to change in the available fields. To remove default text, replace the text in the field with a single space.

{% hint style="danger" %}
**Do not edit** text inside curly brackets **`{{ }}`** or HTML tags (**`<a href="">`** and **`</a>`**). Editing them will break theme functionality.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Common changes to theme content

***

Below you'll find the most common changes to default theme content. Use the search and filter bar in the default theme content editor to find and replace the theme text.

{% hint style="info" %}
To learn about adding translations, check out our guide for [selling in multiple languages](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/multiple-languages).
{% endhint %}

### Buy buttons

***

The add-to-cart and Buy now buttons have the default text "Add to cart" and "Buy it now".

Find this text in **Products > Product** area of the default theme content editor.

### Powered by Shopify

***

The "Powered by Shopify" text appears in the footer on every page.

* In your theme editor, click the **Actions (**<kbd>**...**</kbd>**)** button and select **Edit default theme content**.
* Search "Powered by Shopify" to find the default text in the **Checkout & system > Links** area.
* To remove default text, replace the text in the field with a single space.

### Newsletter

***

The **Newsletter form** includes default text for the submit button ("Subscribe"), email placeholder ("Your email"), and confirmation message ("Thanks for subscribing!").

Find text in the **General >** **Newsletter form** area of the theme content editor.

### Shipping and taxes

***

Default "Shipping and taxes" message automatically appear depending on store's settings in **Shopify admin** > [**Shipping and delivery**](https://admin.shopify.com/settings/shipping).

* In your theme editor, click the **Actions (**<kbd>**...**</kbd>**)** button and select **Edit default theme content**.
* Search <kbd>shipping\_policy\_</kbd> or <kbd>tax included</kbd> to find default text for the **Cart** and **Products.**
* To remove default text, replace the text in the field with a single space.

{% hint style="danger" %}
**Do not edit** text inside curly brackets **`{{ }}`** or HTML tags (**`<a href="">`** and **`</a>`**). Editing them will break theme functionality.
{% endhint %}

| Field                                                                       | Default text                                     |
| --------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ |
| <mark style="color:blue;">Taxes and shipping policy at checkout html</mark> | "Taxes and shipping calculated at checkout"      |
| <mark style="color:blue;">Taxes included and shipping policy html</mark>    | "Tax included. Shipping calculated at checkout." |
| <mark style="color:blue;">Shipping policy html</mark>                       | "Shipping calculated at checkout."               |
| <mark style="color:blue;">Include taxes</mark>                              | "Tax included."                                  |

### Checkout

***

You can change the default text of the Checkout. Click the **Checkout** tab to find all text found in the Checkout.

{% hint style="success" %}
**Checkout is a Shopify feature**. While the checkout default content can be accessed through the theme content editor, the Checkout is not controlled by the theme. For issues and questions, please [contact Shopify Support](https://help.shopify.com/en/support/support-type).
{% endhint %}


# Multiple languages

Learn how to sell in multiple languages and translate your Shopify online store, and enable the language and country selector in the Eclipse theme.

Selling in multiple languages can increase sales by reaching customers all over the world. You can add multiple languages in your Shopify admin and use a translation app to translate your store content.

Once you set up multiple languages, customers can choose their preferred language with Eclipse's language selector.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you have multiple languages enabled, **some sections and features require extra steps** to enter translated words into the theme editor, including the Header's Mega menu, product variant swatches, and variant chips.
{% endhint %}

## Add multiple languages to your store

***

Before adding new languages, make sure your store meets the [requirements for selling in multiple languages](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/markets/languages#requirements).

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;">STEPS</mark></summary>

In your **Shopify Admin**:

1. Go to **Settings** and click **Languages**.

   ![](/files/VyAXodSD2DzCtSuCkLuM)
2. Click **Add Language**. Select a language from the menu, then click **Next**.

   ![](/files/7032qVVyHTkl6icpMuMj)
3. Select an [existing market](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/markets/managing-markets#add-a-market) to add your language to, then click **Done**.

   ![](/files/KufA0onN3Heyd4zpuTnV)

   > See Shopify's guide to [managing markets](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/markets/managing-markets#add-a-market) to add and configure the countries and regions you sell to.
4. Under **Unpublished languages**, click **Edit** to add your translations before publishing them.

   ![](/files/krFf22e4ElqPNhWkgkO9)

</details>

## Add translation app to translate store content

***

**Translation apps** let you add and edit all store content, such as custom content added to your products, pages, and sections.

Eclipse is compatible with Shopify's free [Translate & Adapt](https://apps.shopify.com/translate-and-adapt) app. The app fully integrates with and can be accessed through the theme editor.

{% hint style="info" %} <mark style="color:blue;">**Note**</mark> Other third-party translation apps are available on [Shopify's app store](https://apps.shopify.com/). Our theme support does not cover app integration. We recommend duplicating your theme before adding any apps and testing them thoroughly before purchasing. Please contact app developers for assistance.
{% endhint %}

### Install and use Translate & Adapt

![](/files/EqnsdO5MwRUM92Fa0gAC)

Download the [Translate & Adapt](https://apps.shopify.com/translate-and-adapt) app and follow the steps provided in the app and [Shopify's app manual](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/markets/languages/translate-adapt-app).

All translations are organized by category, such as **Products**, **Pages**, and **Blog posts**. You can also edit translations included in all theme assets and theme sections.

When finished your translations, remember to go to **Settings > Languages** to publish your languages.

{% hint style="warning" %}
Tags on Shopify (such as product tags, article tags, and blog tags) cannot be translated.
{% endhint %}

## Theme translations

***

Eclipse includes 4 pre-packaged **theme translations** for French, German, Italian, and Spanish.

Theme translations are for text elements included in and controlled by the theme. All other content needs to be manually entered or auto-translated with a translation app.

In the **Translate & Adapt** app, you can add and edit translations for **Theme assets** and **Theme sections**.

![](/files/8gAhE8nHj4HKcs7sftlP)

### Enable language selector

Customer's can select their preferred language by using Eclipse's **language selector**.

The selector will appear when languages are added and published.

To enable the language selector, click on the **Header** or **Footer** sections in the theme editor. Click to check **Enable language selector**.

## Fixing translations errors

***

In some theme strings, code with curly brackets (**`{{ code }}`**) are included to dynamically show the correct content on your site.

If you're using an app that auto-translates your store content, errors can occur when code is translated. For example, the code **`{{count}}`** shows the number of search results. If "count" is translated to another language, the code will not work.

* In **Translate & Adapt**, open **theme assets** and use the search bar to find strings with a curly bracket **`{`**.
* Re-add the code in the 'English' column to the translated language column.

![](/files/FmfEWyXb0qQ11DYQ0bNU)

![](/files/zVtBAaLaBQrc7rYnuucc)


# Unique content for markets

Learn how to create custom content for specific markets using Shopify's Contexts in the theme editor. Watch a tutorial video to show international customers unique promotions and shipping details.

With Shopify **Contexts**, you can adapt your theme to display unique content for different customers. For example, you can showcase promotions or collections for specific countries. Or you might want to display different shipping policies for international customers.

In your theme editor, switch **contexts** to edit how your theme appears for specific markets or B2B customers. Get started by watching the video tutorial below.

{% hint style="warning" %}
Since Shopify Markets and Contexts are not theme features, please direct all support-related questions to the Shopify team who will be able to assist you. See Shopify's [Store contextualization guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/store-contextualization) for more information.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/wQ9TdGnUxLT8B4oOzaX5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Watch video tutorial

***

Watch our video tutorial to learn how to use contexts. The video includes examples for setting up:

* **Unique announcement bars**
* **Promoting seasonal items for specific markets**
* **Showing the correct shipping details for international customers**

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/W_Y-Ft-jH0w>" %}

## Editing contexts

***

If you have multiple markets or use B2B on Shopify, they will appear in the 'Context' dropdown menu of your theme editor.

Your **Default context** provides the default content and layout for all other contexts. Editing a contexts for a market will override the default settings.

Once you've overridden default settings in a context, you won't be able to change those settings by editing the default view. You will need to edit those settings in the updated context.

{% hint style="info" %}
**The context will automatically switch if you change the language or country selector** within the theme editor. If you accidentally edit the wrong context, you can [reset your context to the default](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/store-contextualization#resetting-your-context-to-default).
{% endhint %}

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;">STEPS</mark></summary>

In your theme editor (**Customize**):

1. Select the market or B2B that you want to edit from the Context dropdown menu.

   > You can add and edit your markets through your Shopify admin. Go to **Settings > Markets**, then click ‘Add new market’. If you need help setting up markets, please reach out to [Shopify’s support team](https://help.shopify.com/en) who can walk you through this.
2. Edit your templates and theme settings in the selected context.

   > You’ll see a warning popup to let you know you’re are overriding the Default context. Go ahead and click ‘Continue’.

   > Once you override the Default context, it will show a green diamond indicator here to let you know that this section in the context will now need to be edited separately.
3. Click **Save**.

</details>

## Updating themes with edited contexts

***

If you are manually updating your theme, you will need to transfer any files for your customized contexts.

New theme files are automatically created when you edit a context. These files include the word 'context' in the name, as well as the country code. For example: **`header-group.context.eu.json`**, **`footer-group.context.ca.json`**, **`overlay-group.context.it.json`**.

> See our [Theme updates guide](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) for more information.


# Customizing your site

We're only able to provide a limited amount of support (questions and bug fixes — that's about it!), but we want to offer some pointers on what to look out for if you're thinking of **customizing your theme code** or **installing a third-party app**.

## Finding experienced developers

***

There are, without question, going to be moments when you need a small tweak that you can't accomplish with the existing theme settings. In situations like these, you're going to need to engage a web developer. You may already know someone who's a web developer, and we recommend reaching out to them and beginning to foster that relationship.

If you don't know anyone, we would recommend going to [Task Husky](https://account.taskhusky.com/aff.php?aff=153\&page=fluorescent) or consulting the [Shopify Experts Marketplace](https://experts.shopify.com/). Find someone who has solid examples of previous work, good reviews, and who is a good communicator.

When it comes to developers, experience matters a great deal. While more experience comes along with a higher hourly rate, it also usually comes with significant time savings.

## Editing custom code

***

If you are someone who likes to tinker, you can make a copy of your theme and access the code to play around with. Before you take this route, a couple of things to consider:

* **Always make a copy of the theme to test changes on**. You can publish the copy if you're happy with it but if you completely break things (which is part of the learning process) you can always delete the copy and create a new one.
* **A good grasp of the basics of CSS and HTML will help you greatly**. Codecademy has free courses on both [HTML](https://www.codecademy.com/learn/learn-html) and [CSS](https://www.codecademy.com/learn/learn-css) that can help you learn the ropes.
* **Our theme support does not include help with custom changes**. If you break something, or can't quite get your changes to work in the way you want them to, it may be time to call in a professional.

## Installing third-party apps

***

There are a lot of great apps out there that can expand what your store can do. However, it's not always clear to merchants how apps are related to themes and how they work. To help avoid any surprises or headaches, we want to outline a few things to consider.

The first thing to know is that **our support policy does not cover app setup or any issues caused by apps**. Simply put, there's thousands of apps on Shopify that go through a different vetting process than themes, so compatibility between apps and themes, and any bugs that may result, are the responsibility of app developers.

Another factor to weigh is that apps can affect the performance of your site and slow it down. Some apps may also add code directly into your theme file, which stays there even if you uninstall the app and this may cause problems. They can even break part of your theme functionality.

Here are a few questions you can ask when making a decision about whether to use a particular app:

* Does it add value to the user experience and benefit your customers?
* Does that value outweigh the tradeoff of a slower page speed, for example?
* Do the reviews highlight any common problems?
* Does the app have good documentation and provide active support if something goes wrong?


# H1 heading tags

Headings provide an outline for pages, making it easier to understand what they’re about. All site pages use heading tags to structure its content into multiple levels, from H1 to H6.

H1 headings classify the overall page content, and H2 to H6 headings let you organize content into topics and subtopics.

It’s often unclear how heading tags relate to your site’s appearance and SEO, so we have some answers to common questions below.

## How are H1 headings generated?

***

Our themes follow Shopify’s recommended structure for generating headings.

* The home page uses your **store name** as the H1 heading.
* Product pages, collection pages, site pages, and blogs use the **title** entered in your Shopify admin.

### Editing H1 heading of pages

***

To change the wording of a H1 heading, go to your Shopify admin. In the side panel, open the product, collection, or page. Edit the **Title** field, then click **Save**.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you are looking to change the page title that appears in search listings, [learn more below](#edit-page-title-for-seo).
{% endhint %}

### Editing H1 heading of home page

***

To change your store name, go to **Shopify admin >** **Settings > General**, then click to edit your store name under **Store details**.

## Are keywords in the H1 vital for SEO?

***

Up until the early 2000s, heading tags *were* important ranking factors. This meant that keywords needed to be in headings to rank — but that’s no longer the case.

Today, site headings provide the context for understanding the content of your site. **On their own, headings are not ranking factors for SEO.**

Headings tell you what you can expect a page to be about. To improve your site’s ranking, it’s meeting those expectations that really matters. To learn more, check out our guide for [SEO for Shopify themes](/eclipse/general/improve-seo)

## Common SEO warnings

***

When using SEO tools (like Google Console), you may see some warnings reated to H1 tags. Oftentimes, these warnings do not apply to Shopify online stores, which are structured differently than ordinary sites.

### Multiple or duplicate H1 tags

***

An automated SEO test may have warned you about ‘multiple’ or ‘duplicate’ H1s.

The reason for this is that **there’s one H1 tag used for desktop and one for mobile**. Only one of these tags is actually rendered by the browser at any given time, depending on the device used by your visitor.

Google's own crawlers will not flag this as an issue or duplicate content though, so **you can safely ignore these warnings** in any automated testing. It's just a false positive on the test and shouldn't negatively affect your SEO performance.

### Missing H1 tags

***

An SEO test may warn that you’re site is missing an H1 tag. Even when inspecting the code, it can look like there’s no content to the H1 tag.

However, **this warning can be ignored**. The theme automatically fills the heading content with your store name using an aria-label. SEO tools may mistakenly look for ‘hard coded’ text and not recognize the auto-generated label, which will cause a false warning.

## Why is the home page H1 attached to the logo?

***

Attaching the H1 tag to the logo and store name is Shopify’s recommended SEO structure that’s used by any premium theme.

It may appear that the H1 applies to the logo image, but in fact this piece of code contains the store name. The theme automatically fills the heading content with your store name using an aria-label.

## Editing page title for SEO

***

H1 headings and page titles are not identical and can be edited separately, even though they often have the same content. **While H1 headings appear on pages, the page title appears in search result listings**, along with the meta description below.

![Search listing for Shopify Themes](/files/PSuCy05Cks1nrgnyDLDk)

You can edit the page title and meta description for each page, including the home page, in your Shopify admin. Go to your pages or posts, and click **Edit website SEO**. You can modify the the title, 'meta' description, and URL handle.

For the homepage, go to **Online Store > Preferences > Title and meta description**.

![Homepage search listing title](/files/HOSBJON9TguLdF590Q8b)

## Can I change the heading tags?

***

In some sections, it's possible to change heading tags between H1 and H6. Click a section or title block to find the **Heading tag** setting.

Changing the heading tag will not alter the appearance of the heading text. The heading tag option is used only to change the page's code structure, which can help improve accessibility and SEO.

{% hint style="info" %}
**We recommend using this setting only when necessary.** The structure of heading tags in our themes are intended keep your site accessible to everyone and properly indexed for search engines.

The order and placement of heading tags is important for people who use screen readers to navigate through the page.
{% endhint %}

### Replacing default H1 headings

***

On some templates, it's possible to remove the default H1 heading. If you hide the default title, make sure to add a section with an H1 heading.

#### Hide default H1 headings

***

To remove the default h1 headings, go to your theme editor and open the template you want to edit.

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th width="195"></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Pages</td><td>Click the hide button on the <strong>Page</strong> section.</td></tr><tr><td>Collection page</td><td>Click the hide button on the <strong>Collection banner</strong> section.</td></tr><tr><td>Collection list page</td><td>Click to open the <strong>Collection list</strong> section and deselect the <strong>Show page title</strong> option.</td></tr><tr><td>Blog</td><td>Click to open the <strong>Blog posts</strong> section and deselect the <strong>Show blog title</strong> option.</td></tr><tr><td>Blog posts</td><td>Under the <strong>Blog post section</strong>, click the hide button on the <strong>Title</strong> block.</td></tr></tbody></table>

#### Add H1 heading to replace default

***

If you've hidden the default H1 heading, add a section to serve as the page header. You may want to use the [Slideshow](/eclipse/sections/slideshow), [Rich text](/eclipse/sections/rich-text-1), or [Image with text](/eclipse/sections/image-with-text) section.

Click to open the heading or title block settings, then set the **Heading tag** option to H1.


# Image guide

Learn how to optimize images for your Shopify online store using your theme. Find tips for great product and editorial photography, file sizes and dimensions, and image customization.

Shopify and Eclipse will automatically optimize, resize, and adapt your uploaded images for all devices and screen sizes.

By following a few basic guidelines, you can have images that look great and load quickly on all screen sizes with minimal effort.

* [Best practices for taking and editing web-ready photos](/eclipse/general/image-guide/web-ready-photography)
* [Supported image file formats on Shopify](/eclipse/general/image-guide/file-formats)
* [Recommendations for image dimensions and file size](/eclipse/general/image-guide/image-sizes)
* [Eclipse’s advanced image settings](/eclipse/general/image-guide/theme-image-settings)

### Watch tutorial

Watch our tutorial about optimizing your images for your online store.

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/2vXIDaz5iPk>" %}


# Web ready photography

Images on the web are designed to be **responsive**: they will change size, position, and sometimes be cropped to best fit a user's device.

Before considering technical details like image size, you should focus on the content, composition, and orientation of your photos.

{% hint style="info" %}
Also check out Shopify's excellent [guide to smartphone product photos](https://www.shopify.com/in/blog/smartphone-product-photography)
{% endhint %}

**To simplify matters, we've picked out four of the best tips for taking and editing web-ready photography**:

{% stepper %}
{% step %}

### Position your main subject towards the middle of the frame

When taking product photographs, it is important to leave room around the main subject to allow for cropping. Keeping photos simple will also ensure the subject remains the main focus.

You can enhance your image by following the "**Rule of Thirds**," which involves using your phone's grid setting to place the subject along one of the horizontal or vertical lines. This technique prevents unwanted cropping and makes for more interesting photos.

> For more information on the "Rule of Thirds," see [Adobe's article on the rule of thirds](https://www.adobe.com/creativecloud/photography/discover/rule-of-thirds.html).
> {% endstep %}

{% step %}

### Use Landscape for full-width images and Square for mobile images.

Using landscape (horizontal) photos for full-width and hero images can prevent unwanted cropping or needing to scroll down to see the entire image.

For mobile devices, consider using square images to fill more of the screen and ensure they stack uniformly when repositioned.
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

### Do not add text directly to images — use heading blocks instead

Text included in images may appear stretched and be cropped when resized. Using the theme's Heading blocks, however, will ensure all text is properly positioned and resized for any device.
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

### Use theme image settings to set the focal point of your images.

Use the image focal point option and add mobile-specific images to avoid cropping the key area of your image.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

***

#### Learn more

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image sizes</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/RouorJFRSM07rIK7w17g">/pages/RouorJFRSM07rIK7w17g</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">File formats</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/ELa0IsSPfv6CTIxQrxZZ">/pages/ELa0IsSPfv6CTIxQrxZZ</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Theme image settings</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/EeGZ3W5aZSUdx9ha9Nfm">/pages/EeGZ3W5aZSUdx9ha9Nfm</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Image sizes

When it comes to image size, there are really two questions: **how many pixels wide** and **how many megabytes**? Answering these questions will help make sure that your images look great and load fast.

But the answer isn't about exact measurements: what matters is that your images are **above a minimum pixel width** and **below a maximum file size**.

Shopify and Eclipse will handle the rest and automatically optimize and re-size your images for your visitor's screen or device.

## Two guidelines

***

For optimal image sizes, you can follow these two simple guidelines

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Use a **minimum pixel width** of **`2500 px`** for optimal quality on all screens.

You don't need very large pixel widths for high quality images. In fact, larger pixel widths rarely makes a noticeable difference in quality.
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Use a **maximum file size** of around **`2 mb`** for optimal loading speed.

You don't need to worry if images are a bit over or under the maximum file size.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Theme image recommendations

***

The best image size, shape, and orientation will depend on how it's used: background and hero images will need different dimensions than a logo or icon.

Our image guide for Eclipse combines what we've learned about image size, image formats, and best practices for photos. Below you'll find recommendations for choosing and editing images for different sections and uses on your online store.

* [Product images](#product-images)
* [Collection images](#collection-images)
* [Full-width feature images](#full-width-feature-images)
* [Feature block images](#feature-block-images)
* [Hero images](#hero-images)
* [Background and banner images](#background-and-banner-images)
* [Logos and icon images](#logos-and-icon-images)

### Product images

***

| Size           | Min pixel width: 2500 px.                                                                     |
| -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Orientation    | Square or Portrait (vertical) — choose one for consistency                                    |
| Format         | JPG or WEBP                                                                                   |
| Theme sections | <p>Complementary products<br>Featured collection<br>Product media<br>Recommended products</p> |

Product images appear on **Product pages**, **Collection pages**, and **product listings** used in theme sections.

There are no specific required dimensions for product images. However, we recommend choosing one shape and orientation for all your product images to maintain a uniform appearance in product grids.

Product pages display images added to your product inventory in the Shopify admin. You can customize the Gallery style in the theme editor. Select one of **three layouts** (Grid, List, or Thumbnails) and adjust the **Gallery size**.

**Product listings** (or product grids) appear on **collection pages** and in some **theme sections**. You can customize the aspect ratio and size of all product images in product listing theme settings.

### Collection images

***

| Size           | Min pixel width: 2500 px.                                                |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Orientation    | Square or Landscape (horizontal)                                         |
| Format         | JPG or WEBP                                                              |
| Theme sections | <p>Collection list page<br>Collection list<br>Collection page banner</p> |

Collections images are used for **Collection banners** and **collection listings** used in theme sections.

There are no specific required dimensions. We recommend choosing one shape and orientation for all your featured collection images.

In the theme editor, you can choose to use the feature image added in Shopify admin or upload a custom image for sections with collection listings.

### Full-width feature images

***

| Size           | Min width: 2500 pixels                                 |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ |
| Orientation    | Landscape (horizontal)                                 |
| Format         | JPG or WEBP                                            |
| Theme sections | <p>Grid<br>Image compare<br>Rich text<br>Slideshow</p> |

**Full-width feature images** span the entire section or screen and are often added as section blocks.

Using landscape (horizontal) images can prevent unwanted cropping or needing to scroll down to see the entire image. We recommend avoiding portrait images, which may appear stretched or make customers scroll down to see the whole image.

### Feature block images

***

| Size           | <p>Min width: <code>1250 pixels</code>.<br>Max height: <code>1400 pixels</code><br>File size: <code>2 MB</code> (max 20 MB)</p> |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Orientation    | Square or Portrait (Horizontal)                                                                                                 |
| Format         | JPG or WEBP                                                                                                                     |
| Theme sections | <p>Image with text<br>Multi-column</p>                                                                                          |

Many sections include feature images with adjustable sizes, layouts, and positions. These sections often best highlight product and editorial photography.

### Hero images

***

| Size           | Min pixel width: 2500 px. |
| -------------- | ------------------------- |
| Orientation    | Landscape (horizontal)    |
| Format         | JPG or WEBP               |
| Theme sections | Slideshow                 |

**Hero** images are like full-width images but are typically shorter in height. Horizontal (landscape) images work best and you might consider using a wider aspect ratio like 16:9.

Hero images are often used with text headings, so simple images with minimal, well-positioned content are best.

The Image height and image focal point settings are useful for ensuring the whole image can be viewed without scrolling and its subject remains visible and centered.

{% hint style="info" %}
You can enhance your image by following the "Rule of Thirds," which involves using your phone's grid setting to place the subject along one of the horizontal or vertical lines.

This technique prevents unwanted cropping and makes for more interesting photos. For more information on the "Rule of Thirds," see [Adobe's article on the rule of thirds](https://www.adobe.com/creativecloud/photography/discover/rule-of-thirds.html).
{% endhint %}

### Background and banner images

***

| Size           | <p><strong>Min width</strong>: <code>2500 pixels</code>.</p><p><strong>File size</strong>: <code>2 MB</code> (max 20 MB)</p> |
| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Orientation    | Landscape (horizontal)                                                                                                       |
| Format         | JPG or WEBP                                                                                                                  |
| Theme sections | Email signup                                                                                                                 |

Background and section banner images span the full width and height of a section. If the section is full-width, the image will span the full width of the browser window or screen.

Using landscape images can avoid unwanted cropping or making customers scroll down the page to see a full image. We recommend avoiding portrait images, which may appear stretched or make customers scroll down to see the whole image.

### Logos and icon images

***

| Size           | <p><strong>Pixel width</strong>: 50px - 300px<br><strong>File size</strong>: 1 MB</p> |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Orientation    | Square or Landscape (Horizontal)                                                      |
| Format         | PNG (Transparent background) or GIF (animation)                                       |
| Theme sections | <p>Header<br>Information popup<br>Product details<br>Image with text</p>              |

You can add your store's **Logo** to the **Header**, among other sections like the **Footer**.

In the **Header** settings, we recommend setting the **Custom width** to the actual pixel width of your logo image (between **`50px - 100px`**).

If you enable Eclipse's transparent header, we recommend adding an **alternate logo** with different colors that contrasts with the background color or image.

***

#### Learn more

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Web ready photography</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/WxPqvzyNcXZXceJN89fs">/pages/WxPqvzyNcXZXceJN89fs</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">File formats</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/ELa0IsSPfv6CTIxQrxZZ">/pages/ELa0IsSPfv6CTIxQrxZZ</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Theme image settings</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/EeGZ3W5aZSUdx9ha9Nfm">/pages/EeGZ3W5aZSUdx9ha9Nfm</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# File formats

When saving your images, you'll want to consider what format (or file type) to use. Shopify supports the most common file formats, which are equally great choices for your online store: JPG, PNG, WebP, and GIF.

These formats are popular because they balance size with quality and are widely supported across all browsers.

That said, each format has different benefits and common uses that are worth considering when creating your images.

| Format | Common use                                                                                                                                           |
| ------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| JPG    | The most widely-used format for still images with excellent balance between size and quality.                                                        |
| PNG    | Higher precision yet large file size than JPG. Best for small images (e.g. icons and logos) with transparent backgrounds.                            |
| WEBP   | A relatively newer format with increasing browser-support and superior compression to JPG and PNG. Great for precise images and animation sequences. |
| GIF    | Ideal for small, simple images and animations.                                                                                                       |

***

#### Learn more

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Web ready photography</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/WxPqvzyNcXZXceJN89fs">/pages/WxPqvzyNcXZXceJN89fs</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image sizes</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/RouorJFRSM07rIK7w17g">/pages/RouorJFRSM07rIK7w17g</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Theme image settings</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/EeGZ3W5aZSUdx9ha9Nfm">/pages/EeGZ3W5aZSUdx9ha9Nfm</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Theme image settings

Eclipse's advanced image options let you control the size, shape, position, and general appearance of your images.

Use these settings to make your images fit the sections and look their best. Available image settings will vary between different sections.

## Image aspect ratio

***

![](/files/c18Y9JViI7ouryyknY77)

The **Image aspect ratio** setting lets you crop your uploaded images to make them all **Square (1:1)**, **Landscape (3:2)**, or **Portrait (2:3)**. You can select the **Natural** option to show all images with their original orientation.

We recommend using this option in the Product listing settings to make your product grids and collection pages uniform.

{% hint style="info" %}
The **aspect ratio** describes the relation between the width (w) and height (h) of an image, written as **`w:h`**. For instance, an image that's 400px by 200px has an aspect ratio of **2:1** because its width is twice as large as its height. All square images have an aspect ratio of **1:1** because the width and height are equal.
{% endhint %}

## Mobile-specific images

***

![](/files/gixQhoKaqU3MtxXvba2z)

Using **Mobile-specific images** helps avoid cropping on smaller devices by using alternate images.

Consider using **Square** mobile-specific images to fill more of the screen and ensure they stack uniformly when repositioned.

## Image focal point

***

![](/files/WGagsXgJAExiCLvxky0T)

Using focal points are a useful way to avoid unwanted cropping. When the layout of your site changes to fit different screen sizes, the focal point of your image will remain centered and within frame.

After you've uploaded your image, click **Edit**. Click **(+) Add focal point**. Click and drag the blue focal point to specify the main focus of your image. Click **Save**.

## Image height

***

The **Image height** setting can help keep images full visible without needing to scroll and avoid cropping. Choose to display the image with a **Custom** or the **Original** height (without cropping).

The **Height** is the percentage of the window height on your customer's device. When **Custom height** is set to 50%, the image will always display at half the height of the customer's screen.

## Image size

***

The **Image size** setting lets you control the max width of block images. Use this setting to change an image to either icon- or feature-size.

## Overlay colors

***

Change the **Overlay opacity** using the slider to increase the contrast between the text and image. These settings help make your text readable.

## Text size and alignment

***

Eclipse's **text size and alignment settings** can help headings and captions work well with your images.

Do not add text into your original images. Text will become distorted and cropped when adapted to different screen sizes.

***

#### Learn more

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Web ready photography</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/WxPqvzyNcXZXceJN89fs">/pages/WxPqvzyNcXZXceJN89fs</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image sizes</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/RouorJFRSM07rIK7w17g">/pages/RouorJFRSM07rIK7w17g</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">File formats</mark></td><td><a href="/pages/ELa0IsSPfv6CTIxQrxZZ">/pages/ELa0IsSPfv6CTIxQrxZZ</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# SEO for Shopify

There are many different ways to improve your search rank. Some approaches may be technical, possibly costly. However, the best approach is relatively simple and free.

Rising in search ranks is a gradual process, but there are short-term changes that can have a long-term impact.

The most impactful changes can be done by you, all within the Shopify dashboard and theme editor. The tips below focus on improving the content of your site and how your site appears in search results.

{% hint style="success" %}
You can also check out Shopify's [SEO: A Guide to Generating Store Traffic](https://www.shopify.com/blog/shopify-seo).
{% endhint %}

<details>

<summary>Why am I getting a "duplicate content" warning?</summary>

Some SEO reports will flag URLs that point to the same page as "duplicate content". There's nothing wrong with your site — "duplicate content" flags prevent search engines from listing various URLs for the same page as separate pages. [Learn more about duplicate content](#duplicate-content-warnings) and how canonical URLs are used to automatically avoid any SEO issues.

</details>

<details>

<summary>Are H1 tags important for SEO?</summary>

Site headings provide the context for understanding the content of your site. **On their own, headings are not ranking factors for SEO.**

Headings tell you what you can expect a page to be about. To improve your site’s ranking, it’s meeting those expectations that really matters. Learn more about [H1 tags in Shopify themes](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/h1-heading-tags).

</details>

## Create unique site content

***

The core to improving search ranks comes down to writing content that's relevant and useful to the kind of person you want shopping at your store.

So first, **start writing more content in your unique voice**: write blog posts about your store and what you love, provide detailed product descriptions, and add marketing copy and pages that tell your story.

The number of sites that link to your store will also improve your search ranking. By writing what others want to share, you'll increase your reach with these 'natural' links.

{% embed url="<https://www.shopify.com/ca/blog/copywriting>" %}

{% embed url="<https://www.shopify.com/blog/how-to-start-a-blog>" %}

## Edit content shown in search results

***

![](/files/xAFUOwAZDT9WyIr8jqX5)

Beyond the main content, there's a special type of content called **SEO metadata**. It's this content that appears in search results.

Shopify makes it easy to edit. Go to your pages or posts, and click **Edit website SEO**. You can modify the the title, 'meta' description, and URL handle.

Your aim should be to keep these short and simple. You need to give potential visitors a quick impression of what they can expect and persuade them to click through to your store.

{% embed url="<https://www.shopify.com/ca/blog/seo-title-tag>" %}

{% embed url="<https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/promoting-marketing/seo/adding-keywords#edit-the-title-and-meta-description-for-a-page>" %}

## Use keyword research

***

To show up in search results, you want your site's content to match up with the words and phrases your potential customers will mostly likely use when searching.

**Keywords** are popular search terms that people use in search engines. Using keywords in your headings and content can help expand your reach.

There are free tools to find keywords related to your store and products. For example, check out [Keyword.io](https://www.keyword.io/), [Moz Explorer](https://moz.com/explorer), and [Uber Suggest](https://neilpatel.com/ubersuggest/).

To make the most of these tools, you'll need to reflect on who your customers are and consider what terms they might use when searching.

{% embed url="<https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/promoting-marketing/seo/adding-keywords>" %}

{% hint style="info" %} <mark style="color:blue;">**Some quick tips**</mark>

**Avoid duplicate content**. If your content is very similar to other sites, it can lower your search rank. This might be a good reason to be weary of using AI-generated content.

**You don't need to talk like a robot**. It's important to write for your customers and not for search engines. It's best to talk like *you*. Trying to 'game' search engines can often have a negative impact.

**Learn from other stores**. Try searching keywords related to your store. Check out the top-ranking sites and see what they might be doing differently.
{% endhint %}

## Improve your site structure

***

While your theme and Shopify already structures your content to optimize search ranking, there are a few things you can do to keep your content organized and searchable.

Focus on making a **clear navigation for your store**, with **link text that clearly describes the page** that's linked. Also make sure to **fix any broken links**, as search engines use them to map out your site.

> You can use [Mega menus](/eclipse/header/header/mega-menu) to create clear pathways for large catalogs.

{% embed url="<https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/promoting-marketing/seo/optimize-site#optimizing-your-online-store-navigation>" %}

## More SEO tools

***

There are some more advanced steps you can take for SEO. See Shopify's guide for more in-depth tips and instructions.

{% embed url="<https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/promoting-marketing/seo>" %}

### Duplicate content warnings

***

SEO reports will often flag links with “duplicate content”. But there’s no need to worry — Shopify themes use [canonical URLs](#canonical-urls) to automatically prevent issues that might be caused by duplicate content, and you don’t need to take any further action.

“Duplicate content” simply means that there are multiple URLs that point to the same webpage. For instance, a page could be accessed through `www.mystore.com/page` or `www.mystore.com/page?ref=facebook`.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Sites are not penalized for duplicate content**, unless the content is scraped from other sites in order to deceptively manipulate search results.
{% endhint %}

#### Canonical URLs

When there are multiple URLs for a single page, search engines need to decide which URL they should use in search results. This URL is called the canonical URL.

Shopify automatically adds **canonical URL tags** to all pages, which tells search engines the “official” URL that should be included in search results.

Canonical URLs prevents search engines from indexing alternate URLs as separate pages, which can reduce the quality of search results.

{% hint style="success" %}
Canonical URLs and all aspects related to store domains are managed by Shopify. For more help, we recommend reaching out to the [Shopify Support Team](https://support.shopify.com/).
{% endhint %}


# Online store speed

The speed and performance of your online store is key to a great shopping experience. Keeping track of your store speed can help avoid problems that may impact your customer's experience.

That said, **speed scores are not "pass or fail" grades**. You may surprised by a low speed rank but no need to panic! Low speed ranks doesn't mean your site is broken. Sites with more quality content and features will naturally have a slower speed rank — but usually it's worth it!

**Slow page speed becomes a problem** when it noticeably impacts load-time, usability, and discoverability of your site. We'll help put your store speed in context and show you how to balance the costs and benefits when making changes to your store.

## Measuring page speed

***

While there are many tools to measure site speed, Shopify's [Online Store Speed Report](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/os/store-speed/speed-report#frequently-asked-questions) provides the most useful picture of your site's performance.

Most online speed rankers will compare your online store to *all types* of websites, which can be like comparing apples to oranges because Shopify stores are far more powerful than standard sites.

Unlike the speedometer in your car, speed scores do not tell you your exact speed. They are a relative ranking of how your store compares to similar stores.

Shopify's Speed Report compares your store against other stores that are similar to yours, based on:

* Number of sales
* Number of products and variants
* Types of products
* Traffic
* Apps installed
* Theme used

The online speed score gives you a sense of whether your store is slower, faster, or the same speed as similar stores.

A lower speed rank does not always reflect a problem with your site — sites with more quality content and features will naturally have a slower speed rank — but it’s usually worth it!

## Contributing factors

***

Most changes made to your online store will impact speed, even though it can often be imperceptible when browsing your site.

Your score may change when you add new products or collections, install an app, or add features and content to your pages.

Some of these factors are out of your control, such as Shopify's infrastructure, your customer's device and connection, and theme code. We'll cover those factors you can improve below.

**Factors that influence your store speed include:**

* Shopify infrastructure
* Third-party libraries and services
* Analytic libraries
* Apps
* Theme code
* Store features
* Custom development
* Image and Video content
* Number of products

## Theme performance

***

The performance of Eclipse is our top priority. Eclipse meets Shopify's code and performance standards and we're committed to making continual updates to improve our theme.

Eclipse ensures high site performance through optimized resources and dynamic loading. For example, Eclipse will automatically display the optimal image size depending on the customer's device. Eclipse also uses "code splitting" and "lazy-loading" to load content and resources only when needed.

We recommend checking Eclipse's changelog to keep updated on the latest theme version. If you have any specific questions or concerns about Eclipse, please [get in touch](https://fluorescent.co/help/contact) with our Support.

## Improving store speed

***

Your speed report can help remind you when to review your site's performance and also track your relative speed rank over time.

When you are concerned about a low store speed, review your site page-by-page and note where you there's visible slowness or impacted features. Some pages, like the home page and product page, will naturally have a lower speed that does not reflect the overall speed of your site.

**Start with small incremental changes**. Some causes of slowness may be obvious — for example, too many apps, especially when unused. However, making small gradual changes will help you balance an improved store speed with providing a high-quality shopping experience.

Before making any changes, we encourage carefully weighing the benefits and costs of particular features before changing or removing them. Remember: it's not about *faster*; it's about *balance*.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Updates to your speed score can be delayed up to a few days after changes are made**. Your rank will also vary over time based on changes other stores have made, even if you haven't made any.
{% endhint %}

### Remove unnecessary apps

***

Both the code added by apps and the total number of apps will increase page load times, sometimes significantly.

Remove any apps that are no longer being used and weigh the benefits of an app (does it contribute to your bottom line?) against the cost of speed.

See our article on using third-party apps with questions to consider before downloading.

### Design concise pages with impact

***

It can be tempting to use all the features and content at your fingertips. Generally, following the principle of "less is more" can make for the most effective site designs.

Focus on a small set of theme sections per page that achieve the most amount of impact, whether your goal is to sell your product, promote your brand, or engage customers with your story.

Also consider **reducing the number of images or autoplay videos** on a page or **products** shown in on a single collection, page, or section.

### Optimize image and videos

***

Avoid uploading oversized videos. For sections with autoplay videos, we suggest a maximum limit of 10mb or about 10 seconds. The most effective autoplay videos are short and concise.

Both Shopify and Eclipse make sure the optimal size of your images are loaded — so typically, there's no need to fret about images sizes. However, if you're concerned about the size of your images, check out Shopify's [10 Must Know Image Optimization Tips](https://www.shopify.ca/blog/7412852-10-must-know-image-optimization-tips).

### Limit store features and custom code

***

There are some features that are "heavy" and will have a larger impact on speed. Custom code can also come at a cost, so we again recommend making smaller gradual changes rather than drastic overhauls.

For example, disabling Shopify's Dynamic "Buy now" button can significantly increase your product page speed but at the cost of the potential benefit of your conversion rate.

If you are using custom fonts, consider using system fonts: Shopify's [font picker](https://shopify.dev/themes/architecture/settings/fonts#available-fonts) supports hundreds of great fonts that load faster than custom fonts.

> See [Shopify's Store speed manual](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/store-speed/improving-speed) to learn more about improving your store's speed.


# Accessibility

Web accessibility is about making websites usable for as many people as possible. Accessible websites benefit everyone, including people with disabilities, visitors using mobile devices, or those with slow network connections.

## Theme accessibility standards

***

**Fluorescent themes** aim to meet the highest standards of web accessibility, outlined by the [Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG)](https://www.w3.org/TR/WCAG21/). Our themes and Shopify support these guidelines, and we continue to update our themes to meet these standards as they evolve.

This article focuses on how to keep your online store accessible while customizing its theme. You'll find a couple guidelines to get you started and further resources for testing.

## Follow accessibility guidelines

***

In some cases, there are accessibility guidelines that our themes support but cannot enforce. For instance, because themes allow site colors to be fully customized, it is the store owner’s responsibility to select colors that meet accessibility standards.

When customizing your theme, we recommend following Shopify's guidelines on [Accessibility for themes](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/accessibility). You'll find guidelines and recommendations for:

* [Text accessibility](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/accessibility#text-accessibility)
* [Alt text for images](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/accessibility#alternative-text-for-images)
* [Slideshows and videos](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/accessibility#slideshow-and-video-accessibility)
* [Keyboard support](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/accessibility#keyboard-support)

You may also want to use the [A11y Project Checklist](https://www.a11yproject.com/checklist/) to make make sure your site complies with the [Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG)](https://www.w3.org/WAI/standards-guidelines/wcag/).

***

We recommend starting with two guidelines that are commonly overlooked:

### Color contrast for text

If the background color is too similar to the text, it can make it difficult to read. This can be especially challenging for people with visual impairments, such as color blindness. You can use free online tools, like [Accessible Web’s Contrast Checker](https://accessibleweb.com/color-contrast-checker), to help you select colors that meet accessibility standards.

### Alternative text for images

Alt text, or alternative text, is a text description added to an image’s HTML code. The text description may be read aloud by assistive technology, like screen readers, used by people with visual impairments. Alt text also appears when an image does not load. Learn how to [Add alt text to product images](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/product-media/add-alt-text) and [theme images](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/accessibility/adding-alt-text).

## Find professional help

***

You may want to contact a development company or design firm that specializes in accessibility compliance. One firm that specializes in Shopify work is Diff, but there's a great list of experts available on the [A11y Project website](https://www.a11yproject.com/resources/#professional-help).

## Review apps for accessibility

***

Shopify apps may not comply with these guidelines, and using multiple apps can impact accessibility. When installing apps, keep accessibility guidelines in mind and contact app developers if you have any questions.


# Theme settings

**Theme settings** are used for your store's general styles and site-wide options. Any changes will affect all sections and templates.

* Click the ‘gear’ icon in theme editor's side panel to open **theme settings**.
* Customize **colors** and **fonts** to change your site's general appearance.
* Customize site-wide options for **products**, **search**, **cart, social media** and more.

<figure><img src="/files/ZkfiAnkFoFQIpvv338KF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Colors</strong></mark></td><td>Set up site-wide colors and color schemes</td><td><a href="/pages/GTWzpa5cunXxd2eahdYX">/pages/GTWzpa5cunXxd2eahdYX</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Typography</strong></mark></td><td>Customize site fonts</td><td><a href="/pages/sTIdl8D6MyqIPNFktnM3">/pages/sTIdl8D6MyqIPNFktnM3</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Corner rounding</strong></mark></td><td>Change the corner radius of images, buttons, and other elements</td><td><a href="/pages/c0xn9qQjgz0tPqMmW1eX">/pages/c0xn9qQjgz0tPqMmW1eX</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Cart</strong></mark></td><td>Customize cart styles</td><td><a href="/pages/mrv0HwGOcDfWfjEzGlJ6">/pages/mrv0HwGOcDfWfjEzGlJ6</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Swatches</strong></mark></td><td>Show color buttons for product variants</td><td><a href="/pages/XeP1NCniPgMwEdnnBXop">/pages/XeP1NCniPgMwEdnnBXop</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Products</strong></td><td>Change the appearance of <a href="/pages/2Gasi5kDHeXN5iRWofFr">sibling product swatches</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Product listings</strong></mark></td><td>Customize product card styles, badges, and quick shopping.</td><td><a href="/pages/jT9R0Hn146I7dPLOgcJK">/pages/jT9R0Hn146I7dPLOgcJK</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Currency format</strong></mark></td><td>Customize how currencies are prices are displayed</td><td><a href="/pages/2mJll77Mcf1CwzwZXoOl">/pages/2mJll77Mcf1CwzwZXoOl</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Blog</strong></mark></td><td>Set up article categories for blog filter</td><td><a href="/pages/ydrcl9k5L15zk7koOPOo#show-category-filters">/pages/ydrcl9k5L15zk7koOPOo#show-category-filters</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Predictive search</strong></mark></td><td>Customize quick search style</td><td><a href="/pages/my27xj6ezRVDTgkmeoiq">/pages/my27xj6ezRVDTgkmeoiq</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Social media</strong></mark></td><td>Add social account links for icons</td><td><a href="/pages/mCJHKhLvVsXWSqCUVn2i">/pages/mCJHKhLvVsXWSqCUVn2i</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Favicon</strong></td><td>Upload a 32 by 32px image to show in browser tabs</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Social media

{% columns %}
{% column %}
Display social media icons by adding your account links in your theme settings.

In your theme editor, go to **Theme settings > Social media.** Enter the full URL of your social media pages.

Social media icons can be enabled in Footer blocks: [Newsletter and Socials](/eclipse/footer/footer/newsletter-and-socials) and [Image Text and Socials](/eclipse/footer/footer/image-text-and-socials).
{% endcolumn %}

{% column %}
{% hint style="info" %}

#### **Supported icons**

**Discord**

**Facebook**

**Houzz**

**Instagram**

**Line**

**LinkedIn**

**Pinterest**

**RedNote**

**Snapchat**

**TikTok**

**Tumblr**

**X**

**Vimeo**

**WeChat**

**WhatsApp**

**YouTube**
{% endhint %}
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}


# Theme styles

Theme styles apply pre-selected settings for colors, fonts, and minor design elements. The change can be quite subtle but will give you a basic starting point for customizing your store’s branding.

{% hint style="info" %}
*Theme styles do not change the layout of page sections, the header, footer, or any individual section settings. You can download other presets to access demo layouts:* [*Eclipse*](https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse/presets/eclipse)*,* [*Ripple*](https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse/presets/ripple)*, and* [*Coastal*](https://themes.shopify.com/themes/eclipse/presets/coastal)
{% endhint %}

## Select theme style

***

Eclipse has 3 theme styles named after the demo store with the same style settings.

In **theme settings > theme style**, switch to another theme style, then customize the theme settings to make it your own.

> **Note:** The theme style will overwrite your current settings. Make sure you've duplicated your theme to keep as a backup.

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

In your **Shopify Admin**:

1. (*Recommended*.) [Duplicate your theme](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/managing-themes/duplicating-themes) to save as a backup.
2. In the theme editor, click the **Theme settings** gear icon.
3. Click the **Theme style** tab.
4. Select a preset to preview the styles.
5. To apply the theme style, click **Change style**.
6. Click **Save**.

</details>


# Fonts

A wide selection of **Fonts** are available for the logo, headings, body text, and buttons. These fonts are applied site-wide. All fonts are provided by Shopify's font picker. See a full list of [fonts supported by Shopify](https://shopify.dev/themes/architecture/settings/fonts#available-fonts).

In the theme editor, click the **Theme settings** icon, then click to open the **Fonts** tab.

{% hint style="info" %}
See our blog post on [Choosing the best font pairings for your store](https://fluorescent.co/blog/font-pairing) for helpful tips and some handpicked examples.
{% endhint %}

## Headings

***

Select the font for headings of sections and pages.

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Casing</mark></td><td>Display text in all uppercase letters or use the casing of the text as entered in the heading fields.</td><td><strong>Normal</strong><br><strong>Uppercase</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Letter spacing</mark></td><td>Adjust the space between letters for headings of sections and pages</td><td><strong>-2.5 - 2.5</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop font size</mark></td><td>The font size (in pixels) for section and page headings.</td><td><strong>24 - 72</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile font size scale</mark></td><td>Adjust the heading text size on mobile as a percentage of the desktop size. Set it to `100%` to use the same text size as desktop.</td><td><strong>50 - 100</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Body text

***

Select a font for body text and descriptions.

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Casing</mark></td><td>Display text in all uppercase letters or use the casing of the text as entered.</td><td><strong>Normal</strong><br><strong>Uppercase</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Letter spacing</mark></td><td>Adjust the space between letters for body text and descriptions.</td><td><strong>-2.5 - 2.5</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop font size</mark></td><td>The font size (in pixels) for body text and labels.</td><td><strong>15 - 22</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile font size scale</mark></td><td>Adjust the body text size on mobile as a percentage of the desktop size. Set it to `100%` to use the same text size as desktop.</td><td><strong>50 - 100</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Navigation

***

Select a font for navigation text and menu links in the header.

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Casing</mark></td><td>Display text in all uppercase letters or use the casing of the text as entered.</td><td><strong>Normal</strong><br><strong>Uppercase</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Letter spacing</mark></td><td>Adjust the space between letters for navigation text and menu links in the header.</td><td><strong>-2.5 - 2.5</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop font size</mark></td><td>The font size (in pixels) for navigation links in the header.</td><td><strong>24 - 72</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Buttons

***

Select a font for all button labels.

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Casing</mark></td><td>Display text in all uppercase letters or use the casing of the text as entered.</td><td><strong>Normal</strong><br><strong>Uppercase</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Letter spacing</mark></td><td>Adjust the space between letters in button labels.</td><td><strong>-2.5 - 2.5</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Colors

You can change the **Colors** of elements across your store, including general colors, header colors, footer colors, and product colors.

In the theme editor, click the **Theme settings** icon, then click to open the **Colors** tab.

{% hint style="info" %}
We recommend using WebAIM's [contrast checker](https://webaim.org/resources/contrastchecker/) when matching colors to make sure your text is clear and readable for everyone.
{% endhint %}

## Color schemes

***

A **color scheme** consists of a set of colors that you can use for sections throughout your store. Color schemes help you create consistent palettes.

* Customize and create new color schemes in theme settings
* Apply color schemes to sections in section settings

<div><figure><img src="/files/sXi5uhmtUdleBi713l6u" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/IbjgGmxuq50rAajoF4cv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Edit and add color schemes

***

In **Theme settings**, click a color scheme to edit its color options. Click **(+) Add scheme** to add a new color scheme.

#### Color scheme options

Every color scheme has the following color options.

<table><thead><tr><th width="192">General colors</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background</mark></td><td>The background of the section, which spans the full height and width.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background gradient</mark></td><td>Some sections can use a gradient background instead of a solid color background.<br><br>You can choose the style, angle, position, and opacity of the gradient. See Shopify's <a href="https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/theme-structure/color-scheme#gradients">color gradient guide</a> to learn more.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>All text included in the section.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Lines and borders</mark></td><td>All lines and borders that appear between or within sections.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Accent</mark></td><td>Special design elements in sections</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Accent foreground</mark></td><td>Text or icons that overlay accent elements</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Buttons</strong></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Solid buttons</mark></td><td>The background and text colors for buttons with solid style</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Outline buttons</mark></td><td>The background, text, and border colors for buttons with outline style</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Buttons with icon</mark></td><td>The background and foreground colors for buttons with icons</td></tr></tbody></table>

> Note: Solid and Outline button styles use the **Accent** and **Accent foreground** colors as the hover colors.

## Popovers, Modals, and Drawers

***

Select a color scheme to apply to **Popovers, Modals,** and **Drawers**.

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Popovers and modals</mark></td><td>Select a color scheme for popups and modals, such as popups and information popups.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Drawers</mark></td><td>Select a color scheme for menus and cart drawers.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Products

***

Select colors for elements used in product listings and product pages.

<table><thead><tr><th width="180">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Sale</mark></td><td>The 'Sale' badge on product cards.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Sold out</mark></td><td>The 'Sold out' badge on product cards.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Low inventory</mark></td><td>The low inventory message on product cards.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">In stock</mark></td><td>The 'In stock' text on product cards.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Notifications

***

Select colors for notification messages in forms.

<table><thead><tr><th width="184">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Success</mark></td><td>Success messages for forms.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Error</mark></td><td>Error messages for forms.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Corner rounding

{% hint style="info" %}
This feature is available in v3.0 and later. Learn how to [update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) to access new features.
{% endhint %}

Use the **Corner radius** settings to change the roundness of elements across your site — including images, inputs, buttons, drawers, and popups.

Corner radius settings apply to elements across your theme. Some sections and blocks have an option to [toggle on or off the image corner radius](#toggle-image-corner-radius).

<div><figure><img src="/files/AZoEmr8YE6FFcZqk0VFh" alt="" width="188"><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/FnnQEjUGUgbYpVlAceMo" alt="" width="563"><figcaption><p>Square versus rounded corners</p></figcaption></figure></div>

In your theme editor, go to **Theme settings > Corner rounding**

<table><thead><tr><th width="145">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Drawers and modals</strong></td><td>All drawers and modals, including:<br><br><a href="/pages/mrv0HwGOcDfWfjEzGlJ6">Quick cart</a> | <a href="/pages/my27xj6ezRVDTgkmeoiq">Search drawer</a> | <a href="/pages/NDNmiM6RXB5UBg2SGGk1">Mega menus</a> | <a href="/pages/tmqhtEeqe0kEwBajWsS1">Popups</a> | <a href="/pages/8QM9MhSVD7IyUm1qmdWk">Quick shop</a> | <a href="/pages/4uBlRVxwxgMywTAHMM51">Info popup</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Popovers</strong></td><td>All dropdown menus and submenus, as well as the <a href="/pages/zEU9QfrufUDUQ66Uik9x">Sticky add-to-cart</a>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Small cards and containers</strong></td><td>All small cards and containers, including:<br><br><a href="/pages/mrv0HwGOcDfWfjEzGlJ6">Cart items</a> | <a href="/pages/wKfSEZOr3mnW5sKVCczG">Complementary items</a> | <a href="/pages/NT42s0vcW8ou1qa1abGZ">Free shipping bar</a> | <a href="/pages/Ug0RI0DCr5i244UFarCz">Featured icon with text</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Images</strong></td><td>All images, including <a href="/pages/jT9R0Hn146I7dPLOgcJK">product listings</a>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Image thumbnails</strong></td><td>All small image thumbnails, including:<br><br><a href="/pages/xHSCxA4JXppUU1PTbj98">Product media gallery</a> | <a href="/pages/mrv0HwGOcDfWfjEzGlJ6">Cart items</a> | <a href="/pages/zEU9QfrufUDUQ66Uik9x">Sticky add-to-cart</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Buttons</strong></td><td>All buttons, including <a href="/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA#variant-selector-style">variant chips</a> and <a href="/pages/0vzTP0Stl3Zu9uSeRacx">filter button</a>.<br><br><strong>Does not include</strong>: <a href="/pages/XeP1NCniPgMwEdnnBXop#swatch-options">Swatches</a>, Cart icon, Quick view button, Image zoom icon, quantity buttons, or slider cursors.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Form inputs</strong></td><td>All dropdown menu buttons, text fields, and checkboxes. For example:<br><br><a href="/pages/my27xj6ezRVDTgkmeoiq">Search bar</a> | <a href="/pages/mV9uWQ3XDoM8Qh00YAUc">Newsletter signup</a> | <a href="/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA">variant dropdowns</a>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Badges</strong></td><td>All <a href="/pages/lHkYr8Pi1m4nEvlL00o4">sale and sold-out badges</a> in product listings and product pages.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Toggle image corner radius

***

In some sections and blocks, you have the option to use rounded corners or not. The **Enable image corner radius** option is enabled by default.

Click the section or block to find the settings:

* [Image content block](/eclipse/sections/overview/content-blocks#image-block)
* [Product overview image block](/eclipse/product-pages/product-content-blocks#content-blocks)
* [Blog post template - Content block](/eclipse/pages/blog-post-page#customize-page-style)
* Page section


# Page templates

In the **theme editor**, find and edit **templates** to design the layout of pages on your store. Find guides for each type of template below.

> For an introduction, see our [guide to using templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates).

{% hint style="warning" %}
At first, every type of page uses the same **default template**. For example, if you edit the **Default product template**, your changes will appear on all product pages.

* To design different layouts for pages, [create and assign a new template](/eclipse/pages/templates/create-and-assign-templates) for those pages.
* To show unique page content in the same template, use [dynamic content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in sections.
  {% endhint %}

## Theme templates

***

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Home page</strong></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/400lFDUcHF1NmIJTGC0y"><strong>About page</strong></a></td><td><a href="/pages/400lFDUcHF1NmIJTGC0y">/pages/400lFDUcHF1NmIJTGC0y</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Blogs page</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/ydrcl9k5L15zk7koOPOo">/pages/ydrcl9k5L15zk7koOPOo</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Blog posts page</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/dn1jFBE3Ublrax3M86K3">/pages/dn1jFBE3Ublrax3M86K3</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Cart page</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/mrv0HwGOcDfWfjEzGlJ6">/pages/mrv0HwGOcDfWfjEzGlJ6</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Collection page</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/nDkOTQqJHCYlNsly39ZF">/pages/nDkOTQqJHCYlNsly39ZF</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Collection list page</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/USBap1sw4BRBHIE4Io1b">/pages/USBap1sw4BRBHIE4Io1b</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Contact page</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/fFWKXoUTVDy0OBadoxa9">/pages/fFWKXoUTVDy0OBadoxa9</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Password page</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/gw7Vz3ZSaYpH4r9hWPGe">/pages/gw7Vz3ZSaYpH4r9hWPGe</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Product page</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/aisI9BbTgpWHb8KFAHWr">/pages/aisI9BbTgpWHb8KFAHWr</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Search page</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/YbOZT1Sw2hHjCBTG5ja6">/pages/YbOZT1Sw2hHjCBTG5ja6</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>404 page</strong></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Shopify templates

***

The following templates are controlled by Shopify. For questions and issues, please [contact Shopify Support](https://help.shopify.com/en/support/login)

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Gift cards</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/gift-card-products/add-update-gift-card-products">https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/gift-card-products/add-update-gift-card-products</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Checkout</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/checkout-settings">https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/checkout-settings</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Customer accounts</strong></mark></td><td><a href="https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/customers/customer-accounts">https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/customers/customer-accounts</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Using templates

Your online store consists of different types of **pages**, including: the *home page*, *product pages*, *collection pages*, *blogs*, and other *pages*.

Pages are designed using **templates**. In the theme editor, you change the look and layout of your pages by editing their assigned templates.

* There are **default templates** for each type of page. *Editing a default template will apply the same layout to all pages that use that template*.
* To **use different layouts for specific pages**, create new templates, then assign those templates to your pages in the Shopify admin.

## Design pages with templates

***

Open your theme editor to find default templates for every type of page.

* Add page content in Shopify admin
* Customize layout with sections and blocks
* Customize general page styles

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Edit templates to design pages</strong></mark></td><td>Use sections to create the layout of your page.</td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Use different templates for pages</strong></mark></td><td>Create new templates for specific collections, products, or pages.</td><td><a href="/pages/97v9H5JzZKQHdefhuemn">/pages/97v9H5JzZKQHdefhuemn</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Assign templates to pages</strong></mark></td><td>To make your changes live, assign the template to your pages in the Shopify admin.</td><td><a href="/pages/97v9H5JzZKQHdefhuemn">/pages/97v9H5JzZKQHdefhuemn</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Customize page styles

***

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Color scheme</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td><a href="/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6">/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Content width</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td><a href="/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt">/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Content padding</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td><a href="/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov">/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Animation</strong></td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Preview changes

***

When you open a template, the theme editor selects a page (e.g. one product or collection) to preview the changes made to that template.

* Click **Change** in the "PREVIEW" section to view a different page with that template.
* To view a full preview of the live site, click more **`…`** > **Preview**. The preview will open in a new window, and you can click **Share preview** to copy the preview link to share with others.

### Create unique page layouts

***

At first, every type of page uses a **default template**. For example, if you edit the **Default blog post template**, any changes you make will apply all blog post pages.

* To design different layouts for pages, **create and assign a new template** for those pages.
* To show unique page content in the same template, use **dynamic content** in sections.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Create and assign new templates</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/97v9H5JzZKQHdefhuemn">/pages/97v9H5JzZKQHdefhuemn</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Add dynamic page content</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/D5LdKTduRuTo2dDLnqmZ">/pages/D5LdKTduRuTo2dDLnqmZ</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Customize page styles

Templates

Many pages templates have the same general style settings. These settings let you customize the content width, top and bottom padding, and animation styles.

### Page colors

***

You can change the page colors by assigning a color scheme using the color scheme picker in the page section settings.

Color schemes are sets of colors. You can add and define different color schemes in **Theme settings > Colors**.

<figure><img src="/files/fOrc6uVsbB6elVRJdyxv" alt="" width="267"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Content width

***

Change the **Page width** to adjust how far the section spans across the page. Available width options will vary depending on the type of section.

`Click Page section to find settings`

| Setting                                               | Description                                | Options                                                                                                                            |
| ----------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| <mark style="color:blue;">Content width</mark>        | Choose the width of the section content.   | <p><strong>Page width</strong><br><strong>Custom width</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></p> |
| <mark style="color:blue;">Custom content width</mark> | Set a custom width for the section content | *<mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark>*<mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 650</mark>                         |

### Section padding

***

Use the sliders to add space at the top or bottom of the section. Set to 0 to remove spacing.

`Click Page section to find settings`

<figure><img src="/files/GKReBH3EfMLtTnOAek62" alt="" width="338"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Animations

***

Eclipse uses **animation** effects when loading images and text to create a more engaging user experience.

<table><thead><tr><th width="265">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable text animation</mark></td><td>When enabled, headings and text slide up and fade into view upon loading.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image animation</mark></td><td><p>Change the animation style of how the image loads. Select <strong>None</strong> to disable load animations.<br><br><strong>Fade</strong>: The image gradually fades into view.<br></p><p><strong>Iris swipe</strong>: The image is revealed in the form of a growing circle.</p></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Create and assign templates

At first, there is one **Default template** for every type of page. This means that **changes made to a default template will apply to all pages that use that template**.

To change the content or style of specific pages, you will need to **create a new template** and then **assign that template** to those pages in the Shopify Admin.

> To show unique page content in the same template, use [dynamic content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in sections.

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

In your theme editor (**Customize**):

1. Use the **Templates selector** to open the **Products**, **Collections**, **Pages**, **Blogs**, or **Blog posts** templates.
2. Click **Create template**.
3. Enter a **Name** for your new template and click **Create template**.

   > The new template will duplicate the settings of the original template.
4. Under **Preview**, click **Change** to preview different pages with this template.

   > If a warning icon **(!)** appears, you need to assign the template in your Shopify admin.
5. To assign a template, go to the page in the Shopify admin and use the **Theme template** menu to select a specific template.

   > Templates cannot be assigned on **unpublished** or **trial** themes. All changes to your templates will be saved but can only be assigned when purchased and published.
6. Click **Save**.

</details>

### Assign templates from unpublished theme

***

Shopify only allows you to assign templates from your published theme. Shopify will not show templates from unpublished themes, unless they have the same name as the published theme’s templates.

As a workaround, you can **create a duplicate template in the published theme and give it the same name as the template from the unpublished theme**. This new template will show in the Shopify admin and assigning it will apply the template to both themes.

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

1. Open the theme editor for your published theme (**Customize**).
2. Use the template selector to find your currently assigned template.
3. Click **(+) Create template**.
4. Enter the exact same **Name** as the template in your unpublished theme.
5. Select the current template that the new template should be **based on**.

   > This will duplicate everything in the current template and will ensure nothing changes in your current theme when you assign the new template.
6. Click **Create template**.

In your Shopify admin:

1. Go to the page you want to assign the template to.
2. Click the template dropdown and select your template.

   > For products and collections, you can [use the bulk editor to assign templates](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/theme-structure/templates#bulk-template-changes) to more than one at a time.
3. Click **Save**

</details>


# About page

Eclipse has two "**About us" page templates** with preset layouts based on the theme demo stores.

Use these templates to design a page that tells your story, showcases your vision and team, and shares details about your locations and hours.

{% hint style="info" %}
Check out Shopify's post about [what to include in your "About Us" page](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/theme-structure/pages#about-us).
{% endhint %}

## Add page and apply template

***

In your Shopify admin, **add a page** to your online store, then **select the template** that you want to apply to that page.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
From your Shopify admin, go to **Online Store** > [**Pages**](https://admin.shopify.com/pages)
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Enter a **Title** for the page. For example: "About us".

{% hint style="info" %}
The **Title** and **Content** will not appear on the page template. All page content is added in the theme editor

The title is used for the URL (e.g. **`www.store.com/about-us`**).
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Click the **Template** menu, and select `about-1` or `about-2` template to apply it to the page.

{% hint style="info" %}
Learn how to [assign templates for **unpublished** themes](/eclipse/pages/templates/create-and-assign-templates#assign-templates-from-unpublished-theme).
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/73K24rtJTyrdPA0DAeyc" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Click **Save**.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

## Edit page template

***

In the theme editor, open the template to customize the layout and content of your page.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}

#### Open template

In the **Theme editor**, click the **Home page** templates menu.

Click **Pages** and select the `about-1` or `about-2` template.
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

#### Preview page

In the side panel, next to **Preview**, click **Change** and select the page you created.

{% hint style="info" %}
A warning symbol **(!)** means that the template is not assigned to the current page. Go to **Online Store** > [**Pages**](https://admin.shopify.com/pages) to apply the template.
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

#### Add and edit sections

Under **Template**, click the default sections to edit them, and click **(+) Add section** to add other [theme sections](/eclipse/sections/overview).
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}


# Blog page

Template

The **Blogs page** lists your latest blog posts.

<figure><img src="/files/SLixEvzBE81kHiuOH1wQ" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing a template will change all pages that use that template**.

[Create and assign new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) to design different page layouts.

[Add dynamic content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) to show page-specific content in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Customize page styles

***

Change the page **color scheme** and adjust the **page width and padding**.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Color scheme</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td><a href="/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6">/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section width</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td><a href="/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt">/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section padding</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td><a href="/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov">/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Customize layout

***

* Choose to show the **blog title**.
* Change the **number of columns** and **articles per page**.
* Change the **featured article color scheme**

`Click Blog page section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show blog title</mark></td><td>Display the title of the blog.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Articles per page</mark></td><td>Set the number of articles to display per page.</td><td><strong>1-12</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 8</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of columns</mark></td><td>Choose the number of columns for displaying articles.</td><td><strong>2</strong><br><strong>3</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Customize featured article

***

The blog displays the **Featured article** by default. You can disable the **feature the first article** option to display all posts as a **Grid**.

When enabled, you can customize the appearance of the featured articled:

* Choose the **color scheme**
* Change or remove **image overlay**
* Adjust **heading size** of article title.

`Click Blog page section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Feature the first article</mark></td><td>Display the first article in a featured format.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Color scheme</mark></td><td>Select a set of colors to apply to the featured article section. You can add and define different color schemes in Theme settings > Colors. <a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-colors">Learn more</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Overlay opacity</mark></td><td>Use the slider to change the transparency of the overlay. Set the opacity to 0% to turn off the overlay.</td><td><strong>0 - 100%</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 20%</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading size</mark></td><td>Change the size of the heading text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1 - 8</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile heading size</mark></td><td>For mobile screens, change the size of the heading text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1 - 8</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Show category filters

***

Choose to show **category filters** to allow visitors to filter blog posts by article categories.

{% hint style="success" %}
By default, all **blog post tags** are used as article categories.

* Go to **Online Store > Blog posts** to edit **Tags** for each post.
* Go to **Theme settings > Blog** to [limit which tags are shown as article categories](#choose-which-tags-to-show-as-categories).
  {% endhint %}

<div><figure><img src="/files/WOGoAr00P8Kfh2O5z9gp" alt="" width="375"><figcaption><p>Categories filters on blog page</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/46tKmsJ07eSU0ijUNfWB" alt=""><figcaption><p>Blog post tags setting in admin</p></figcaption></figure></div>

`Click Blog page section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="214">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show category filters</mark></td><td>Display article categories to allow visitors to filter blog posts.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show category filter counts</mark></td><td>Display the number of posts for each category. Important: If you have more than one blog, the count will include tagged posts for all blogs.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Customize posts style

***

By default, posts show a featured image, post details, and an optional 'read more' button.

Click the **Blog posts** section to customize the appearance of posts:

* Change the **image aspect ratio** of post images
* Choose which **post details** to show
* Choose to show optional **read more button**

### Change image aspect ratio

***

Change the **aspect ratio** to crop post images to be a uniform shape.

{% hint style="info" %}
The **aspect ratio** of an image is the proportion between its **w**idth and **h**eight (w:h). A square image has equal width and height (1:1), whereas most images are either wider (2:1) or taller (1:2).
{% endhint %}

`Click Blog posts section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Select an <strong>aspect ratio</strong> to crop images to be a uniform shape, or select <strong>Natural</strong> to display images in their original shape.</td><td><strong>Natural</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Portrait (2:3)</strong><br><strong>Portrait (4:5)</strong><br><strong>Square (1:1)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (5:4)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (3:2)</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show blog post details

***

By default, posts display the title, date, author, and tags. Click **Blog posts** to choose which **blog post details to show**.

{% hint style="success" %}
To edit the post details, go to **Online Store > Blog posts** from the Shopify admin.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/N2452wPXUMV7EFYC15sh" alt="" width="224"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Blog posts section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="212">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show article tags</mark></td><td><p>Shows tags that you've added to posts in the Shopify admin.<br><br></p><p>Go to <strong>Online Store > Blog posts</strong> to edit <strong>Tags</strong> for each post. Go to <strong>Theme settings > Blog</strong> to <a href="#choose-which-tags-to-show-as-categories">limit which tags are shown</a>.</p></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show author</mark></td><td>Display the name of who created the blog post.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show published date</mark></td><td>Display the date when the post was published.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show excerpt</mark></td><td>When checked, the first few lines of the post will appear below.<br><br>You can add a custom excerpt to blog posts in your Shopify admin.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show read more button

***

Chose to show a "Read more" button for each post. Clicking the post image or title will also redirect to the blog post page.

`Click Blog posts section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show "Read more" button</mark></td><td>Display a button that links to the blog post.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button style</mark></td><td>Change the style of the "Read more" button.</td><td><strong>Solid</strong><br><strong>Outline</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Text</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Enable scrolling category text

***

Show a **scrolling text bar** with the blog post tags when hovered over. You can also change the **Scroll direction and speed**.

{% hint style="success" %}
By default, all **blog post tags** are displayed.

* Go to **Online Store > Blog posts** to edit **Tags** for each post.
* Go to **Theme settings > Blog** to [limit which tags are displayed](#choose-which-tags-to-show-as-categories).
  {% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/FxH1dV8pbGGehtVfSYBD" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Blog page section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable scrolling category text on hover</mark></td><td>Show scrolling category text when hovering over articles.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Scroll duration</mark></td><td>Set the duration for the scrolling category text.</td><td><strong>5-45</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 10</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Scroll direction</mark></td><td>Choose the direction for the scrolling category text.</td><td><strong>Left</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Choose which tags to show as categories

***

By default, all **blog post tags** are used as article categories. Article categories appear in [category filters](#show-category-filters), [scrolling category text](#enable-scrolling-category-text), and [article tags](#show-blog-post-details).

You may not want to show all tags that you've added in your Shopify admin. To limit which tags are shown as article categories, go to **Theme settings > Blog.**

In the **Article categories** field, enter the tags you want to use in a comma-separated list. For example: `Guides, News, Interviews`.

<figure><img src="/files/KkVLUaBifktSCCp9guES" alt="" width="320"><figcaption><p>Article categories option in theme settings > blog</p></figcaption></figure>


# Blog post

Template

The **Blog Post template** provides the design and layout of your blog post articles. Publish **Blog posts** to share store announcements, updates, and featured content, and help increase organic traffic to your site.

{% hint style="info" %}
Check out Shopify's guide on [How to start a blog and grow your audience](https://www.shopify.com/blog/how-to-start-a-blog).
{% endhint %}

## Add blog posts in Shopify admin

***

Before editing the **Blog post template**, you need to add at least one blog post in your Shopify admin.

Blog posts use the **Featured image**, **Title**, **Content**, **Tags**, **Published date** and **Author**.

{% hint style="success" %}
Blog posts are a Shopify feature. Learn how to [create a blog](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/blogs/adding-a-blog) and add [blog posts](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/blogs/writing-blogs).
{% endhint %}

## Customize page style

***

Click the page section to edit the **general styles**, available for all page templates:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Color scheme</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td><a href="/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6">/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section width</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td><a href="/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt">/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section padding</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td><a href="/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov">/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Customize post title block

***

The **Title block** display the blog post title. You can customize the title width and text size.

`Click Title block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Full width title</mark></td><td>Display the title at full width</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading size</mark></td><td>Set the size of the blog post title</td><td><strong>1-8</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 6</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show blog post details

***

By default, posts display the published date, author, and tags. Click **Blog post** to choose which **blog post details to show**.

{% hint style="success" %}
To edit the post details, go to **Online Store > Blog posts** from the Shopify admin.
{% endhint %}

<table><thead><tr><th width="224">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show article tags</mark></td><td>Display tags associated with the blog post</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show author</mark></td><td>Display the author of the blog post</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show published date</mark></td><td>Display the date the blog post was published</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change featured image size

***

Change the **width** and **height** of the featured image, for both desktop and mobile screens.

{% hint style="success" %}
The blog posts template display the **featured image** added in your Shopify admin. Go to your Shopify admin to upload images for your blog posts.
{% endhint %}

`Click Featured image block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Width</mark></td><td>Set the width of the featured image</td><td><strong>Full width</strong><br><strong>Full width padded</strong><br><strong>Page width</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image height</mark></td><td>Set the height of the featured image</td><td><strong>Adapt to image</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Custom</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom desktop height</mark></td><td>For desktop, set the Custom banner height to a <strong>fixed height</strong> (in pixels) or <strong>relative height</strong> (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td>Fixed height<br><strong>250 - 750px</strong><br>Relative height<br><strong>50 - 100%</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 450px</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom mobile height</mark></td><td>For mobile, set the Custom banner height to a <strong>fixed height</strong> (in pixels) or <strong>relative height</strong> (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td>Fixed height<br><strong>150 - 750px</strong><br>Relative height<br><strong>50 - 100%</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 350px</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Enable post comments

***

In the Shopify admin, you can choose to enable comments. The comment form includes fields for Name, Email, and Message.

{% hint style="success" %}
Blog posts comments are a Shopify feature. See Shopify's guides for [Managing comments on blog posts](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/blogs/managing-comments).
{% endhint %}

## Show share buttons

***

By default, the **Share block** displays icons for sharing your post to social media. Use the drag-and-drop handles to **re-order** the block or **remove** the block.

### Enable native OS sharing

***

Enable **native OS sharing** to replace share icons with sharing options on a user’s device. Visitors can share the blog post through apps like Messages, Email, or their social media apps.

<figure><img src="/files/1NPNP7cGngCfnpp9aklo" alt="" width="293"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Share block to find settings`

| Setting                                                   | Description                                                                                   |
| --------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| <mark style="color:blue;">Enable native OS sharing</mark> | When enabled, a "Share this" link will open the native sharing options for the user's device. |


# Contact page

Template

Use the **Contact page template** to let customers message you through the contact form.

* Customize the **content and layout** your contact page
* Add **custom fields and buttons** to the custom form

## Create contact page

***

You first need to **create a page** and **assign the contact template** in your Shopify admin.

{% hint style="success" %}
Pages are a Shopify feature: see Shopify's guide for [creating pages](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/theme-structure/pages).
{% endhint %}

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

In your **Shopify admin**:

1. Click **Online store > Pages**.
2. Click **Add page**.
3. Add a **Title** (e.g. "Contact us").

   > The title will be used for the page URL (e.g. **`www.store.com/contact-us`**).

   > You don't need to add anything to the **Content** field. You will add the page content by editing the template in the theme editor.
4. Click the **Theme template** menu and select **contact** to assign the template to your page.

   > **Note**: Templates can't be assigned on unpublished themes. Your changes to templates will be saved and can be assigned when you buy and publish the theme.
5. Click **Save**.

</details>

## Set up contact form

***

Click **(+) Add block** to add additional fields and inputs for your contact form.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Text input</strong></td><td>Show a text field for customers to add a single word or line.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Text area</strong></td><td>Show a text field for customers to add multiple lines.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Select dropdown</strong></td><td>A menu of multiple options that requires a single choice.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Radio buttons</strong></td><td>A list of buttons for multiple options that requires a single choice.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Checkbox</strong></td><td>Add multiple checkboxes that allow for more than one selection.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Phone</strong></td><td>A text field for the customer's phone number.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Email</strong></td><td>A text field for your customer's email.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Submit</strong></td><td>(<em>Required</em>) The contact button that sends the message.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add content blocks

***

Click **(+) Add block** to add blocks for **Headings**, **Text**, and **Spacers** to help organize and explain the contact form fields.

Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks, and add **Spacer** and **Divider** blocks to further customize the layout.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Heading</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Text</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Spacer</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show reCAPTCHA terms

***

`Click Contact form section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="233">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show reCAPTCHA terms</mark></td><td>Show the terms of service and privacy policy for Google's reCAPTCHA form.<br><br>Google reCAPTCHA is enabled by default on all Shopify stores to minimize spam from bots.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Password page

Template

Before you launch your store, you can use Shopify's password page feature to restrict access to your store. When the password page is active, all store pages are hidden and will not appear in search engine results.

<figure><img src="/files/2wyKL6el53DbNarnsSf4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
See Shopify's guide on [Password protection for your online store](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/password-page).
{% endhint %}

## Customize page styles

***

Click the page section to edit the **general styles**, available for all page templates:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Color scheme</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td><a href="/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6">/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section width</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td><a href="/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt">/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section padding</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td><a href="/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov">/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up password header

***

The **Password page header** displays your store title and a login link to allow users to access the site with a password.

* Change the **color scheme** of the password header
* Change the header **layout**
* Add a **logo image**
* Enable the **transparent header**

`Click Password header section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Color scheme</mark></td><td>Select a set of colors to apply to the password header. You can add and define different color schemes in Theme settings > Colors. <a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-colors">Learn more</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Layout</mark></td><td>Position the logo to the left or center of the page header.</td><td><strong>Logo center</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Logo left</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image. There are no required dimensions. We recommend an image with a minimum width of 50px. Use PNG files for images with a transparent background.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Brand logo</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image width</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width (in pixels) of the image on desktop.</td><td><strong>20-350 px</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 120</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image width</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width (in pixels) of the image on mobile.</td><td><strong>20-250 px</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 90</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Transparent header</mark></td><td>Make the header transparent.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up background image

***

`Click Password page section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image for the password page background.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate image for mobile devices.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop height</mark></td><td>For desktop, set the Custom banner height to a <strong>fixed height</strong> (in pixels) or <strong>relative height</strong> (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td>Fixed height<br><strong>250 - 750px</strong><br>Relative height<br><strong>50 - 100%</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 100%</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom mobile height</mark></td><td>For mobile, set the Custom banner height to a <strong>fixed height</strong> (in pixels) or <strong>relative height</strong> (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td>Fixed height<br><strong>150 - 750px</strong><br>Relative height<br><strong>50 - 100%</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 100%</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add image overlay

***

The image **overlay** adds a layer of color to your image. Overlays help balance image and text for clarity and readability.

* Choose a **Color scheme** for the overlay and overlay text
* Change the **Opacity** to make the overlay more or less transparent

`Click Password page section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Overlay opacity</mark></td><td><p>Use the slider to change the transparency of the overlay. Set the opacity to 0% to turn off the overlay.</p><p>Set to 100% to display a solid color (instead of the image).</p></td><td><p><strong>0 - 100%</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 20%</mark></p></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add content blocks

***

Click **(+) Add block** to add text and image content to the section. Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks, and add **Spacer** and **Divider** blocks to further customize the layout.

<div><figure><img src="/files/y6QvuNTjUyDpm7r7AO5y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/ilLCbPLKSa8N4nzH3WMB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Heading</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Text</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Overline text</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Image</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Spacer</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Divider</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Show share buttons

***

Click **(+) Add block** and select **Share** to show icons for sharing your page to social media.

The **Native OS sharing** option replaces the social sharing icons with button that allows users to share to apps on their device (e.g. Messages).

`Click Share block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable native OS sharing</mark></td><td>Allow sharing using the device's native sharing options</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Search page

Template

The **Search page** appears when visitors submit a search using the search bar. You can customize the layout and results styles, and enable sort and filter options.

{% hint style="success" %}
You can customize search results with Shopify's [Search & Discovery app](https://apps.shopify.com/search-and-discovery). Create custom filters, select result types, and add "synonym groups" to show relevant results. See Shopify's [App guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/search-and-discovery) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

## Customize page styles

***

Click the page section to edit the **general styles**, available for all page templates:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Color sYcheme</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td><a href="/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6">/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section width</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td><a href="/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt">/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section padding</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td><a href="/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov">/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up search results grid

***

`Click Search page section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Products per page</mark></td><td>Set the maximum number of products to display per page.</td><td><strong>1-50</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 20</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of columns on desktop</mark></td><td>Select the number of search results to show per row on desktop.</td><td><strong>2</strong><br><strong>3</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>4</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of columns on mobile</mark></td><td>Select the number of search results to show per row on mobile.</td><td><strong>1</strong><br><strong>2</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show total number of results</mark></td><td>Display the total number of results listed.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up filtering and sorting

***

`Click Search page section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable sorting</mark></td><td>Allow customers to sort results.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable filtering</mark></td><td>Allow customers to filter by product options, product type, price, availability, and more.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show sticky filter and sort button</mark></td><td>Allow customers to filter results by type, price, availability, and more.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Filter group default</mark></td><td>Choose to hide values of filter groups until visitors click to reveal them.</td><td><strong>First opened</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>All open</strong><br><strong>All closed</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Color swatch layout</mark></td><td>Choose how to display color swatch filter options.</td><td><strong>Compact</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Expanded</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Sections

**Sections** are the basic components of your pages. You can add, edit, and rearrange sections to create different layouts with the content and features you want.

Eclipse includes **static sections** that appear on every page and **dynamic sections** that can be re-used and customized to design unique pages.

{% hint style="info" %}
For a general introduction, read our [guide to using sections](/eclipse/sections/overview/section-styles).
{% endhint %}

<h2 align="center">Static sections</h2>

***

**Static sections** appear on every page in the same position and their settings are applied site-wide.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><a href="/pages/4nwxCEuZ4oW62L8oglyH">/pages/4nwxCEuZ4oW62L8oglyH</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/prrlMAYCguxucI4qiimI">/pages/prrlMAYCguxucI4qiimI</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/f2nUvotrwJi2X897VCbl">/pages/f2nUvotrwJi2X897VCbl</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

<h2 align="center"><strong>Dynamic sections</strong></h2>

***

**Dynamic sections** have their own settings for every template that you can add or remove, reuse, and rearrange.

### Feature content

Showcase images, video and text in various formats

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><a href="/pages/woMyvu3L3wOCExmP4ndx">/pages/woMyvu3L3wOCExmP4ndx</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/PUhIY5iN3E7VDhcm4CWn">/pages/PUhIY5iN3E7VDhcm4CWn</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/DSZKLWnDf7xUEEPaUT0p">/pages/DSZKLWnDf7xUEEPaUT0p</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/fpXwJxYqjAjWbRaAyQPB">/pages/fpXwJxYqjAjWbRaAyQPB</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/NRFosXBTTTU41eQshMcL">/pages/NRFosXBTTTU41eQshMcL</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/tJPKLPmRt244vyIqxA2E">/pages/tJPKLPmRt244vyIqxA2E</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/7QtML3Xydj5OtnVH4HDU">/pages/7QtML3Xydj5OtnVH4HDU</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><a href="/pages/0MflR16gsRx15gkF5SmR">/pages/0MflR16gsRx15gkF5SmR</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/3AiQW46LdK8CbNJ2ONvR">/pages/3AiQW46LdK8CbNJ2ONvR</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/N8HxuhgIyoDTOZn7xUj3">/pages/N8HxuhgIyoDTOZn7xUj3</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/uhLDR6NP1GbWwCml0jVd">/pages/uhLDR6NP1GbWwCml0jVd</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/51YEPN0Ac4vrFQpgzXUo">/pages/51YEPN0Ac4vrFQpgzXUo</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/fV5qyLOm7XO38bIRHbQ0">/pages/fV5qyLOm7XO38bIRHbQ0</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/oCR4N8zn2CvvaGqyECR8">/pages/oCR4N8zn2CvvaGqyECR8</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Merchandising

Showcase your products and collections

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><a href="/pages/3PeP1XIJCWNcx51zFmAF">/pages/3PeP1XIJCWNcx51zFmAF</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/hLezDaMCXzmjjUrivMJx">/pages/hLezDaMCXzmjjUrivMJx</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/USBap1sw4BRBHIE4Io1b">/pages/USBap1sw4BRBHIE4Io1b</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/rcRaM2D0fRLHwO9zqhWL">/pages/rcRaM2D0fRLHwO9zqhWL</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/hI7qahbQjuoIo7b28FZt">/pages/hI7qahbQjuoIo7b28FZt</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Blog and engagement

Showcase blog content and engage with customers

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><a href="/pages/hqcVYtpA7M5vKzFlxocC">/pages/hqcVYtpA7M5vKzFlxocC</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/MzivGqjx7RoA2J7WXw2L">/pages/MzivGqjx7RoA2J7WXw2L</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><a href="/pages/mV9uWQ3XDoM8Qh00YAUc">/pages/mV9uWQ3XDoM8Qh00YAUc</a></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Using sections

**Sections** are the basic components of templates. You can add, rearrange, and customize sections to create the layout and content of your pages.

## Add sections

***

{% columns %}
{% column width="50%" %}
Sections are listed in the theme editor **sidebar** in the order they appear on the page.

* Click the **(+) Add section** button in the theme editor sidebar.
* Use the **drag handles** (**⋮⋮**) to change the order of your sections and blocks
* Use the **Remove section** button to delete them or click the **eye icon** to hide them.
  {% endcolumn %}

{% column width="50%" %}

<figure><img src="/files/2M0V0ixfMZe1eN9VOV44" alt="Highlighted areas of the Shopify theme editor showing how to open templates, add sections, and re-order sections."><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}

{% hint style="info" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in sections using the same template.
{% endhint %}

### Add blocks

Most sections are made up of individual **Blocks** for text, media, buttons, or other content, which are nested under sections in the editor panel.

* Click **(+) Add block** button to add or select the type of block you wish to add.
* Click the **block** to open the block settings.

<figure><img src="/files/QriVOZDCSfBZ59J00YDr" alt="" width="302"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Section header

***

Some sections have a **Section header** that appears above the main content. Other section may use [content blocks](/eclipse/sections/overview/content-blocks) or overlay text for the main headings.

Click the section to find the header settings.

* Add a **heading**, **text**, and optional **link**.
* To remove the section header, delete any text in these fields.

<figure><img src="/files/tYRRkBa436rKRF3H2n7i" alt="" width="540"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click the section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="158">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>Change or remove the title of the section.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading tag</mark></td><td>Change the heading tag to modify the page structure. Use H2 to indicate important topics, and use H3-H6 for related topics. Learn how to <a href="/pages/o3C4cpr4n90wK1x3sWBC#replacing-default-h1-headings">replace default H1 headings</a>.<br><br>This option doesn't change the heading's appearance.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add multiple lines of rich text below the heading.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Link URL</mark></td><td>Select a page or URL for the link.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Link label</mark></td><td>Add text to display the link.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Section styles

***

All sections include general style options for **Colors** and **Spacing**. In the editor side panel, click the section to find settings for **Color scheme**, **Section width**, and **Section padding**.

### Color schemes

***

{% columns %}
{% column width="66.66666666666666%" %}
You can change the section or block colors by assigning a color scheme using the color scheme picker.

Click the section or block to find the **Color scheme** option.
{% endcolumn %}

{% column width="33.33333333333334%" %}

<div align="left" data-full-width="true"><figure><img src="/files/fOrc6uVsbB6elVRJdyxv" alt="" width="178"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>
{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}

{% hint style="info" %}
A **color scheme** consists of a set of colors that you can use for sections throughout your store. Color schemes help you create consistent palettes.
{% endhint %}

### Edit color schemes

You can add and define different color schemes in **Theme settings > Colors**. These color schemes will appear as options in section and block settings.

In **Theme settings**, click a color scheme to edit its color options. Click **(+) Add scheme** to add a new color scheme.

<div><figure><img src="/files/sXi5uhmtUdleBi713l6u" alt="" width="174"><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/IbjgGmxuq50rAajoF4cv" alt="" width="174"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

#### Color scheme options

Every color scheme has the following color options.

<table><thead><tr><th width="192">General colors</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background</mark></td><td>The background of the section, which spans the full height and width.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background gradient</mark></td><td>Some sections can use a gradient background instead of a solid color background. You can choose the style, angle, position, and opacity of the gradient. See Shopify's <a href="https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/theme-structure/color-scheme#gradients">color gradient guide</a> to learn more.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>All text included in the section.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Lines and borders</mark></td><td>All lines and borders that appear between or within sections.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Accent</mark></td><td>Special design elements in sections</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Accent foreground</mark></td><td>Text or icons that overlay accent elements</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Buttons</strong></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Solid buttons</mark></td><td>The background and text colors for buttons with solid style</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Outline buttons</mark></td><td>The background, text, and border colors for buttons with outline style</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Buttons with icon</mark></td><td>The background and foreground colors for buttons with icons</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Overlay colors

***

When text appears over images or videos, an overlay color is used to provide contrast between the text and background, keeping it readable and [accessible for everyone](/eclipse/general/accessibility).

<div><figure><img src="/files/JmKIkuacZLcZmZmwYM6O" alt="" width="355"><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
In the section or block settings, select a **color scheme.**

{% hint style="info" %}
The overlay uses the color scheme's **background** color. If the color scheme has a **background gradient**, it will be used instead.\
\
Background gradients fade across a range of hues. Learn more in Shopify's [color gradient guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/theme-structure/color-scheme#gradients).
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Use the **overlay opacity** slider to make the tint more or less transparent.

{% hint style="info" %}
Set the opacity to 0% to turn off the tint overlay.

Set the opacity to 100% to create **solid color blocks or banners** in sections like [Grid](/eclipse/sections/grid), [Image hero](/eclipse/sections/image-hero), or [Slideshow](/eclipse/sections/slideshow).
{% endhint %}
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

`Click the section or block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="164">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Overlay opacity</mark></td><td>Use the slider to change the transparency of the overlay.<br><br>Set the opacity to 0% to turn off the overlay.</td><td><strong>0 - 100</strong> %</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Section width

***

{% hint style="warning" %}
Width options were updated in v4.0. View the [changelog](/eclipse/changelog) and [update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) to access new features.
{% endhint %}

Change the **Section width** to adjust how far the section spans across the page. In the section settings, find **Width** options under *Section.*

* The **page width** has a fixed width of 1600px
* Other width options adapt to the visitor's browser width

*Available page width options vary depending on the type of section. The* **Full width (background only)** *is available only for* [*Slideshow*](/eclipse/sections/slideshow)*,* [*Image hero*](/eclipse/sections/image-hero)*,* [*Video hero*](/eclipse/sections/video-hero)*,* [*Newsletter*](/eclipse/sections/email-signup) *and* [*Collection banner*](/eclipse/collections/collection-page/banner)*.*

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><strong>Page width</strong></td><td>Section background and content span the page width (1600px).</td><td><a href="/files/KXOwANhnH80jQD0D7bUN">/files/KXOwANhnH80jQD0D7bUN</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><strong>Full width (padded)</strong></td><td>Section background spans the screen's full width with some padding, and content spans the width of the background.</td><td><a href="/files/k8ye35eg8K9kPTyHbL79">/files/k8ye35eg8K9kPTyHbL79</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><strong>Full width (background only)</strong></td><td>Section background media spans the full screen and content spans the page width (1600px)</td><td><a href="/files/L8Yrq5xpqN3m2y39Jyhp">/files/L8Yrq5xpqN3m2y39Jyhp</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><strong>Full width</strong></td><td>Both section background and content span the screen's full width.</td><td><a href="/files/KN0tRx1sNflpkl3O0DQO">/files/KN0tRx1sNflpkl3O0DQO</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Section padding

***

Use the sliders to add space at the top and bottom of the section. Set to 0 to remove spacing.

<div><figure><img src="/files/GKReBH3EfMLtTnOAek62" alt="" width="338"><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/y88BaLClRCPljbxnyu4N" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>


# Content blocks

Many sections support the same 'rich content' blocks for text, images, buttons, style elements, and custom Liquid. You can add and re-arrange these blocks to customize the section layout.

> Some sections have unique blocks and settings. See detailed guides for these sections: [Blog posts](/eclipse/sections/blog-posts), [Contact form](/eclipse/sections/contact-form), [Featured collection](/eclipse/sections/featured-collection), [Multi-column](/eclipse/sections/multi-column), [Slideshow](/eclipse/sections/slideshow).

<div><figure><img src="/files/ilLCbPLKSa8N4nzH3WMB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/XsgLvI0jbQOuVmgGZuoj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/W5Qt2z3XT9xUOkkngxlt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Heading block

***

Add heading text and change its size. Go to [Theme settings > Typography](/eclipse/theme-settings/typography#headings) to change the font for all headings.

> Sections: [Contact form](/eclipse/sections/contact-form), [Email signup](/eclipse/sections/email-signup), [Image hero](/eclipse/sections/image-hero), [Image with text](/eclipse/sections/image-with-text), [Rich text](/eclipse/sections/rich-text-1), [Video](/eclipse/sections/video), [Video hero](/eclipse/sections/video-hero), [Video with text](/eclipse/sections/video-with-text)

`Click Heading block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of the block.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading size</mark></td><td>Change the size of the heading text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1-8</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 8</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading tag</mark></td><td>Change the heading tag to modify the page structure. Use H2 to indicate important topics, and use H3-H6 for related topics. Learn how to <a href="https://github.com/fluorescent/kb-horizon/tree/main/sections/general/editing-themes/h1-heading-tags/README.md#replacing-default-h1-headings">replace default H1 headings</a>.<br><br>This option doesn't change the heading's appearance.</td><td><strong>H2 - H6</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Text block

***

Add multiple lines of text and change its size. Go to [Theme settings > Typography](/eclipse/theme-settings/typography#body-text) to change the font for all body text.

> Sections: [Contact form](/eclipse/sections/contact-form), [Email signup](/eclipse/sections/email-signup), [Image hero](/eclipse/sections/image-hero), [Image with text](/eclipse/sections/image-with-text), [Product overview](/eclipse/product-pages/product-content-blocks/text-block), [Rich text](/eclipse/sections/rich-text-1), [Video](/eclipse/sections/video), [Video hero](/eclipse/sections/video-hero), [Video with text](/eclipse/sections/video-with-text)

`Click Text block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add rich text. Use the buttons to make the text bold or italicized, or to add a link.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text size</mark></td><td>Change the size of the text.</td><td><strong>1-8</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 3</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Overline block

***

Add small heading text. Go to [Theme settings > Typography](/eclipse/theme-settings/typography#headings) to change the font for all overline text.

> Sections: [Email signup](/eclipse/sections/email-signup), [Image hero](/eclipse/sections/image-hero), [Image with text](/eclipse/sections/image-with-text), [Rich text](/eclipse/sections/rich-text-1), [Video](/eclipse/sections/video), [Video hero](/eclipse/sections/video-hero), [Video with text](/eclipse/sections/video-with-text)

`Click Overline block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="176">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add small heading text to use as a label.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Button block

***

Add a button to link to another page and select a button style. Go to [Theme settings > Typography](/eclipse/theme-settings/typography#body-text) to change the button fonts.

When multiple button blocks are ordered together in the section panel, they will display in a single row.

<figure><img src="/files/hMTnCgtQUV93hUWksqUA" alt="" width="515"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

> Sections: [Image hero](/eclipse/sections/image-hero), [Image with text](/eclipse/sections/image-with-text), [Rich text](/eclipse/sections/rich-text-1), [Video](/eclipse/sections/video), [Video hero](/eclipse/sections/video-hero), [Video with text](/eclipse/sections/video-with-text)

{% hint style="info" %}
The most effective button labels ask customers to do something (e.g. Get started, Join us, Shop now). To learn more, [read "What is a Call to Action?"](https://www.thebalancesmb.com/call-to-action-1794380)
{% endhint %}

`Click Button block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button link</mark></td><td>The URL that you want the button to link to.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button label</mark></td><td>The text that displays on the button.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "Button"</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button style</mark></td><td>Change the style of the button.</td><td><strong>Solid</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Outline</strong><br><strong>Text</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Image block

***

Add an image and adjust its width.

> Sections: [Email signup](/eclipse/sections/email-signup), [Image hero](/eclipse/sections/image-hero), [Image with text](/eclipse/sections/image-with-text), [Product overview](/eclipse/product-pages/product-content-blocks/text-block), [Rich text](/eclipse/sections/rich-text-1), [Video](/eclipse/sections/video), [Video hero](/eclipse/sections/video-hero), [Video with text](/eclipse/sections/video-with-text)

`Click Image block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image. There are no required dimensions. We recommend an image with a minimum width of 50px.<br><br>Use PNG files for images with a transparent background.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image size</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width (in pixels) of the image on desktop.</td><td><strong>50 - 1000px</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 500px</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image size</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width (in pixels) of the image on mobile.</td><td><strong>50 - 1000 px</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 250px</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Spacer block

***

Customize the section layout by adding space between the content blocks.

> Sections: [Contact form](/eclipse/sections/contact-form), [Email signup](/eclipse/sections/email-signup), [Footer](/eclipse/footer/footer/custom-liquid), [Image hero](/eclipse/sections/image-hero), [Image with text](/eclipse/sections/image-with-text), [Product overview](/eclipse/product-pages/product-content-blocks/text-block), [Rich text](/eclipse/sections/rich-text-1), [Video](/eclipse/sections/video), [Video hero](/eclipse/sections/video-hero), [Video with text](/eclipse/sections/video-with-text)

`Click Spacer block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Spacing</mark></td><td>Add a gap of empty space between blocks. Use sliders to adjust the amount of space on desktop and mobile.</td><td><strong>1-50</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 40</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile spacing</mark></td><td>Add a gap of empty space between blocks.</td><td><strong>1-100</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 40</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Divider block

***

Customize the section layout by adding a divider line between the content blocks.

> Sections: [Email signup](/eclipse/sections/email-signup), [Image hero](/eclipse/sections/image-hero), [Image with text](/eclipse/sections/image-with-text), [Product overview](/eclipse/product-pages/product-content-blocks/text-block), [Rich text](/eclipse/sections/rich-text-1), [Video](/eclipse/sections/video), [Video hero](/eclipse/sections/video-hero), [Video with text](/eclipse/sections/video-with-text)

`Click Divider block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Thickness</mark></td><td>Use the slider to increase the thickness of the divider line.</td><td><strong>1-5</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 1</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Spacing</mark></td><td>Use the sliders to add space at the top or bottom of the divider. Set to 0 to remove spacing.</td><td><strong>1-50</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 0</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Liquid block

***

> Sections: [Footer](/eclipse/footer/footer/custom-liquid), [Image hero](/eclipse/sections/image-hero), [Image with text](/eclipse/sections/image-with-text), [Product overview](/eclipse/product-pages/product-content-blocks/text-block), [Rich text](/eclipse/sections/rich-text-1), [Video](/eclipse/sections/video), [Video hero](/eclipse/sections/video-hero), [Video with text](/eclipse/sections/video-with-text)

With the **Custom Liquid** setting, you can extend your theme by adding snippets of Liquid or HTML code as a block or section in the theme editor.

The Custom Liquid block provides a reliable and safer option compared to directly editing your theme code. It will help keep your theme copy eligible for updates and avoid conflicts with the original theme code.

{% hint style="warning" %}
**We do not support code customizations**. Always test code changes on an unpublished copy of your theme. For assistance, we recommend connecting with a professional developer. [Find a certified Fluorescent partner](https://partners.fluorescent.co/).
{% endhint %}

`Click Liquid block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="168">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom Liquid</mark></td><td>Add custom Liquid code for apps or custom content.<br><br>See Shopify's <a href="https://shopify.dev/docs/api/liquid">Liquid reference guide</a> and <a href="https://shopify.github.io/liquid-code-examples/">Liquid code examples</a> to learn more.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Blog posts

Add the **Blogs posts** section to display your latest posts.

* Use the **Grid** or **Featured post** style to showcase the most recent posts.
* Display **Category text** that shows scrolling post tags on featured posts.
* Customize the appearance and details of **blog post cards**.

<div><figure><img src="/files/ulcyMCad5UpZYBpu4a6c" alt=""><figcaption><p>Grid style</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/UCaTq377tyBYeOUEnfxx" alt=""><figcaption><p>Featured article style</p></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Blog posts**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

Click the section to add a **section header** and change **section styles** for colors and spacing.

<table data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section header</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Width and Padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Select blog posts to show

***

{% hint style="success" %}
The section uses your blog post's **Featured image**, **Title**, **Content**, **Tags**, **Published date** and **Author**. See Shopify's guides to [create a blog](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/blogs/adding-a-blog) and add [blog posts](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/blogs/writing-blogs).
{% endhint %}

Select which posts to display, and choose how many you want to show.

`Click Blog posts section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Blog</mark></td><td>Select a blog to display its latest posts, from newest to oldest. Click Change to select a different blog.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of articles</mark></td><td>Choose how many posts to display in the section.</td><td><p><strong>1 - 8</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 6</mark></p></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Use grid or featured article style

***

Choose a section layout. Display all posts as a **Grid** or use the **Featured article** style to showcase your most recent post.

`Click Blog posts section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="172">Setting</th><th width="365">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Style</mark></td><td>Change the layout of the blog posts.<br><br><strong>Featured article</strong>: Displays the most recent article as the largest post and the rest in the sidebar.<br><br><strong>Grid</strong>: Displays the 2 most recent articles as cards and the rest in the sidebar.</td><td><strong>Featured article</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Grid</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Featured article color scheme</mark></td><td>Select a set of colors to apply to the featured article. You can add and define different color schemes in Theme settings > Colors. <a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-colors">Learn more</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Enable scrolling category text

***

Show a scrolling text bar with the featured post's tags when hovered over. You can also change the **Scroll direction and speed**.

{% hint style="success" %}
From your Shopify Admin, go to **Blogs** and click to open your blog post. Enter tags in the **Tags** section that you want to appear in the scrolling category text.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/FxH1dV8pbGGehtVfSYBD" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Blog posts section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable scrolling category text on hover</mark></td><td>Show an auto-scrolling bar with the featured post's tag.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Scroll duration</mark></td><td>Set the number of seconds it takes for the category text to fully rotate.</td><td><strong>5 - 45 seconds</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 10</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Scroll direction</mark></td><td>Choose which way the category text moves.</td><td><strong>Left</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Customize blog post cards

***

Change the visual style of the featured posts, including the **image aspect ratio, blog post details,** and **button.**

### Change image aspect ratio

***

Change the **aspect ratio** to crop post images to be a uniform shape.

{% hint style="info" %}
The **aspect ratio** of an image is the proportion between its **w**idth and **h**eight (w:h). A square image has equal width and height (1:1), whereas most images are either wider (2:1) or taller (1:2).
{% endhint %}

`Click Blog posts section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Select an <strong>aspect ratio</strong> to crop images to be a uniform shape, or select <strong>Natural</strong> to display images in their original shape.</td><td><strong>Natural</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Portrait (2:3)</strong><br><strong>Portrait (4:5)</strong><br><strong>Square (1:1)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (5:4)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (3:2)</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show blog post details

***

Choose which **blog post details to show**.

{% hint style="success" %}
To edit the post details, go to **Online Store > Blog posts** from the Shopify admin.
{% endhint %}

`Click Blog posts section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="221">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show article tags</mark></td><td>Shows tags that you've added to posts in the Shopify admin.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show author</mark></td><td>Display the name of who created the blog post.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show published date</mark></td><td>Display the date when the post was published.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show excerpt</mark></td><td>When checked, the first few lines of the post will appear below.<br><br>You can add a custom excerpt to blog posts in your Shopify admin.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show read more button

***

`Click Blog posts section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show "Read more" button</mark></td><td>Display a button that links to the blog post.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button style</mark></td><td>Change the style of the "Read more" button.</td><td><strong>Solid</strong><br><strong>Outline</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Text</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Customize latest posts sidebar

***

The **Latest posts sidebar** display the remaining posts from your blog, next to the featured posts.

`Click Blog posts section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable thumbnail hover effect</mark></td><td>Display the blog post image when hovering over an article in the sidebar.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of latest posts sidebar.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "Latest post"</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Collapsible content

The **Collapsible content** section has expandable rows that reveal more text when clicked. Use this section for Frequently Asked Questions or neatly organize information about your products or store.

* Add **Rows** with a title and expandable text.
* Display an **icon** next to row titles.
* Arrange rows into **groups** with subheadings.

<figure><img src="/files/lxPHNTAGDW8FLixucCZB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Collapsible content**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

Click the section to add a **section header** and change **section styles** for colors and spacing.

<table data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section header</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Width and Padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Section button

***

`Click section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button link</mark></td><td>The URL that you want the button to link to.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button label</mark></td><td>The text that displays on the button.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button style</mark></td><td>Change the style of the button.</td><td><strong>Solid</strong><br><strong>Outline</strong><br><strong>Text</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add collapsible row blocks

***

Click **(+) Add Row** to create multiple collapsible rows. Use the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order row blocks. Click a row block to start adding content.

* Add **Heading** for the row title
* Add **Text** to reveal when row is opened
* Add **Icon** next to the heading

`Click Row block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Expand by default</mark></td><td>Show row as already opened with the text revealed.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Icon</mark></td><td>Select from 30+ icons to display next to the row heading.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: None</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom icon image</mark></td><td>Upload your own icon image to display next the heading. Use PNG files for images with a transparent background. Recommended minimum dimensions of 50px by 50px.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of the row.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "Frequently asked question"</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add text that's revealed when the row is opened. Use the buttons to make the text bold or italicized, or to add a link.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "This is an example..."</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change row text style

***

Change the **font** and **size** of the heading and text in the row block.

`Click section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Row font</mark></td><td>Change the style of the row heading and text. Text styles are based on your theme settings.</td><td><strong>Heading</strong><br><strong>Body</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Row text size</mark></td><td>Change the size of the text.</td><td><p><strong>1-8</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 6</mark></p></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add group headings

***

Add **Group heading** blocks to arrange multiple collapsible rows into groups.

<figure><img src="/files/X8SPpI0kBUCqGMViqeUf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Group heading block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title for groups of collapsible rows.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "Group heading"</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Collection list

The **Collection list** section displays collections in a **Grid** or **Slider** layout.

* Select which collections you want to show with their featured image and title.
* Customize the appearance and aspect ratio of the collection images.

<figure><img src="/files/awhYMlK1Q15qw5b4fAFI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Collection list**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

Click the section to add a **section header** and change **section styles** for colors and spacing.

<table data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section header</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Width and Padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Select collections to show

***

Select a list of your collections to show. For each collection, the section displays a tile with an image and title.

`Click Collection list section to find settings:`

<table><thead><tr><th width="155">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Collection</mark></td><td>Click <strong>Select collections</strong> to choose which of your collections to show in the section.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Use grid or slider layout

***

Display collections in a **Grid** or single-row **Slider**. Then choose the **Number of columns** to display in one row.

`Click section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="385">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Layout</mark></td><td>Display collection list items in multiple rows or in a single row that visitors can rotate through.</td><td><strong>Slider</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Grid</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show slider scrollbar</mark></td><td>When checked, the scrollbar appears below the collections and allows visitors to move through the slider.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of columns on desktop</mark></td><td>Select the number of collections per row on desktop screens.</td><td><strong>2</strong><br><strong>3</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>4</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of columns on mobile</mark></td><td>Select the number of collections per row on mobile screens.</td><td><strong>1</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>2</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up collection images

***

Choose which images to use for the collection items. By default, the collection image will be used. If no collection image is set, the first product's image will be used.

{% hint style="success" %}
To change the collection image, go to **Products > Collections** in your Shopify admin. Click the name of the collection, then click **Add image** or **Edit > Add image**.
{% endhint %}

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Using color overlays</strong></mark></td><td>Learn how to change overlay colors and use gradients.</td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors</a></td><td><a href="/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ">/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

`Click section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image source</mark></td><td>Choose which image to display for the collection list items.</td><td><strong>First product image</strong><br><strong>Collection image</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change image aspect ratio

***

Change the **aspect ratio** to crop images to be a uniform shape.

{% hint style="info" %}
An image's **aspect ratio** is the proportion between its **w**idth and **h**eight (w:h). A square has equal width and height (1:1), whereas most images are either wider (2:1) or taller (1:2).
{% endhint %}

`Click section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Select an <strong>aspect ratio</strong> to crop images to be a uniform shape, or select <strong>Natural</strong> to display images in their original shape.</td><td><strong>Natural</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Portrait (2:3)</strong><br><strong>Portrait (4:5)</strong><br><strong>Square (1:1)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (5:4)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (3:2)</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Contact form

Add a **Contact form** to allow customers to get in touch with questions and feedback.

* Add custom text fields, buttons, checkboxes, and other options for customers to fill out.
* To create a full contact page, see the [contact page template](/eclipse/pages/contact-page).

{% hint style="success" %}
Sending and receiving messages through the contact form is a Shopify feature. You can test Shopify's free theme Dawn to see if an issue is platform-related. For assistance, you can contact [Shopify support](https://help.shopify.com/en/support/).
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/RjRRMduI0QknSDY5NFkL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Contact form**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Section header

***

The **Section header** appears above the section. Add **Headings** and **Text,** then adjust their **size** and **center** them in the header.

`Click Contact form section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="156">Setting</th><th width="419">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Center header</mark></td><td>Position the header content in the center above the section.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Overline</mark></td><td>The small text above the heading.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "Overline"</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of the section.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "Contact"</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading size</mark></td><td>Change the size of the heading text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1-8</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 5</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading tag</mark></td><td>Change the heading tag to modify the page structure. Use H2 to indicate important topics, and use H3-H6 for related topics. Learn how to <a href="https://github.com/fluorescent/kb-horizon/tree/main/general/editing-themes/h1-heading-tags/README.md#replacing-default-h1-headings">replace default H1 headings</a>.<br><br>This option doesn't change the heading's appearance.</td><td><strong>H1 - H6</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add multiple lines of rich text. Use the buttons to make the text bold or italicized, or to add a link.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text size</mark></td><td>Adjust the size of the section text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1-8</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 3</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up contact form

***

Add various types of **form blocks** to create your contact form.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Text input</strong></td><td>Show a text field for customers to add a single word or line.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Text area</strong></td><td>Show a text field for customers to add multiple lines.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Select dropdown</strong></td><td>A menu of multiple options that requires a single choice.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Radio buttons</strong></td><td>A list of buttons for multiple options that requires a single choice.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Checkbox</strong></td><td>Multiple checkboxes that allow for more than one selection.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Phone</strong></td><td>A text field for the customer's phone number.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Email</strong></td><td>A text field for your customer's email.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Submit</strong></td><td>(<em>Required</em>) The contact button that sends the message.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add content blocks

***

Click **(+) Add block** to add blocks for **Headings**, **Text**, and **Spacers** to help organize and explain the contact form fields. Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks, and add **Spacer** and **Divider** blocks to further customize the layout.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Heading</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Spacer</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show reCAPTCHA terms

***

Google reCAPTCHA is enabled by default on all Shopify stores to minimize spam from bots.

`Click Contact form section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show reCAPTCHA terms</mark></td><td>Show the terms of service and privacy policy for Google's reCAPTCHA form.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Featured collection

Use the **Featured collection** section to display products from a selected collection as a single-row **slider.**

{% hint style="info" %}
Add a [Promotion tile](#add-promotion-tile) with featured image or autoplay video (without sound).
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/3jNTH9bNddxSXmoS9Jgr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Featured collection**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

Click the section to add a **section header** and change **section styles** for colors and spacing.

<table data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section header</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Width and Padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Select feature collection

***

Select a **Collection** from your Shopify admin to display its products.

`Click Featured collection section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="167">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Collection</mark></td><td>Select a collection to display its products.<br><br>Collections are created and edited in your Shopify admin.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change layout

***

Adjust the layout by changing the number of columns for desktop and mobile.

`Click Featured collection section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Maximum number of products</mark></td><td>Set the maximum number of products that should be displayed from the collection.</td><td><strong>1-12</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 8</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of columns on desktop</mark></td><td>Select the number of products per row on desktop screens.</td><td><strong>2</strong><br><strong>3</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>4</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of columns on mobile</mark></td><td>Select the number of products per row on mobile screens.</td><td><strong>1</strong><br><strong>2</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show slider scrollbar</mark></td><td>When checked, the scrollbar appears below the products and allows visitors to move through the slider.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add promotion tile

***

Add a **promotion tile** with an image or autoplay video, promotional text, and link to other pages.

### Add image or autoplay video

***

Add an image or autoplay video (without sound) as the promotion tile's background.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Video requirements" %}
For **autoplay videos**, make sure your video files meet the following requirements:

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th width="210"></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Video file type</strong></td><td><code>.mp4</code> or <code>.mov</code><br><br><em>Embedded YouTube or Vimeo videos are not supported</em>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video length</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 20 seconds (Recommended)</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video size</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 10MB (Recommended)</td></tr></tbody></table>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

`Click Promotion tile block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="191">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image for the promotion tile.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate image for mobile devices.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Video</mark></td><td>Add a short autoplay video (without sound) to replace the image.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add image overlay

***

The image **overlay** adds a layer of color to your image. Overlays help balance image and text for clarity and readability.

* Choose a **Color scheme** for the overlay and overlay text
* Change the **Opacity** to make the overlay more or less transparent

{% hint style="info" %}

#### Use overlay for solid color slide

You can set the **Overlay opacity** to 100% to show solid color tile.
{% endhint %}

`Click Promotion tile block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Overlay opacity</mark></td><td>Adjust the transparency of the color overlay on the promotion tile.</td><td><strong>0 - 100</strong> %<br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 20</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add text

***

`Click Promotion tile block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="321">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>Add a title for the promotion tile.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Promotion</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add descriptive text for the promotion.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text alignment</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content within the promotion tile.</td><td><strong>Top / Middle / Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left / Center / Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add link and button

***

You can make the promotion tile a clickable link or add a button to redirect visitors to another page.

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Link URL</mark></td><td>Enter the URL that you want the promotion tile to link to.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button label</mark></td><td>Enter the text to display on the button.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Shop now</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button style</mark></td><td>Choose the visual style of the button.</td><td><strong>Solid</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Outline</strong><br><strong>Text</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button placement</mark></td><td>Select where to position the button within the promotion tile.</td><td><strong>Standard</strong><br><strong>Bottom-anchored</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Featured links

Use the **Featured links** section to show large links with an image showcase that changes when links are hovered over.

<figure><img src="/files/iDYTBirVJsMmpYSrzMpI" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Featured links**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add featured links

***

Click a **Link block** to add a URL and text for the featured links. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order link blocks.

`Click Link block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="175">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Link URL</mark></td><td>Select a page or URL for the link.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Link label</mark></td><td>Enter text for the link.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image that displays when the link is hovered over. The <a href="#image-showcase">image showcase</a> must be enabled.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Underline</mark></td><td>When enabled, the link text will be underlined.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change link styles

***

In the section settings, change the layout and text styles of the featured links.

* Choose the **display style** for desktop and mobile
* Change the text **font** and **size**
* Adjust the **line height** between links
* Choose the **separator style** between links

<div><figure><img src="/files/PtKRclR22VvkbecEfixr" alt=""><figcaption><p>Stacked</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/6ACDpas4H1YNxb9GZf8Q" alt=""><figcaption><p>Inline with commas</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/jumHDr57ZQr0QVPOtOW4" alt=""><figcaption><p>Inline with dashes</p></figcaption></figure></div>

`Click Featured links section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="155">Setting</th><th width="347">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Link text font</mark></td><td>Choose the font for the link text, as selected in your theme settings.</td><td><strong>Heading</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Body</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text link size</mark></td><td>Change the font size for all link text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1 - 8</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: 3</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Link line height</mark></td><td>Adjust the amount of vertical space between links.</td><td><strong>1 - 2</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: 1.3</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop display style</mark></td><td>For desktop screens, change the layout of links.</td><td><strong>Inline</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Stacked</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile display style</mark></td><td>For mobile screens, change the layout of links.</td><td><strong>Inline</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Stacked</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Inline link style separator</mark></td><td>For "Inline" style, choose the character that separates each link.</td><td><strong>Comma spaced</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Dash</strong><br><strong>Forward slash</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Show product counts for collections

***

If a featured link points to one of your collections, you can display the number of products in that collection.

<figure><img src="/files/GSbbIqLPrpBEOnV8WaMr" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Featured links section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="218">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show product counts</mark></td><td>When enabled, featured links to collections will display the number of products in the collection.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Image showcase

***

Display an image next to the featured links. When hovering over a featured link, display an image.

<div><figure><img src="/files/DfWcCRUUoUbkdvpEXVeC" alt=""><figcaption><p>Desktop stacked with image showcase</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/qkSr8cX1HJfFuA6kOGuN" alt=""><figcaption><p>Mobile stacked with thumbnails</p></figcaption></figure></div>

`Click Featured links section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="168">Setting</th><th width="362">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable image showcase</mark></td><td>Display an image that changes when links are hovered over.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Default showcase image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image to display first, before links are hovered over.<br><br>If no image is uploaded, the default will be the first link's image.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image width</mark></td><td>For mobile screens, adjust the space between content blocks.</td><td><strong>40 - 60 %</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image position</mark></td><td>Display the image showcase on the left or right of the featured links.</td><td><strong>Left</strong><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Aspect ratio</mark></td><td><p>Crop the image to a uniform shape, or select Natural to maintain its original shape.</p><p>"Aspect ratio" refers to the proportion between the image's width and height (W:H).</p></td><td><strong>Natural</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Portrait (2:3)</strong><br><strong>Portrait (4:5)</strong><br><strong>Square (1:1)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (5:4)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (3:2)</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show thumbnails on mobile</mark></td><td>On mobile, display images next to the featured links.<br><br>Only applies to "Stacked" mobile display style.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Section header

***

Add a **Heading** above the featured links and a **Button** belo&#x77;**.**

`Click Featured links section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="153">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>Enter heading text to show above the featured links.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading size</mark></td><td>Change the size of the heading text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1-8</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 8</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading tag</mark></td><td>Change the heading tag to modify the page structure. Use H2 to indicate important topics, and use H3-H6 for related topics. Learn how to <a href="https://github.com/fluorescent/kb-horizon/tree/main/sections/general/editing-themes/h1-heading-tags/README.md#replacing-default-h1-headings">replace default H1 headings</a>.<br><br>This option doesn't change the heading's appearance.</td><td><strong>H1 - H6</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button link</mark></td><td>Select a page or URL for the button.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button label</mark></td><td>Enter text for the button.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button style</mark></td><td>Choose the visual style of the button.</td><td><strong>Solid</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Outline</strong><br><strong>Text</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Feature product

{% hint style="info" %}
The Featured product section was added in v1.2.0 — Learn how to [update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) to access the latest features.
{% endhint %}

Add a **Featured product** section to any page to allow customers to view and add an item directly to their cart.

Customize the layout with options for the media gallery and product detail blocks, and add custom content blocks.

<figure><img src="/files/jtCU5MmLhTM39Zu8wb6H" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Featured product**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Select product

***

Click the section to open the settings. Click **Select product** for the Featured product option.

{% hint style="success" %}
Products are created and edited in your Shopify admin. Learn more about managing products in [Shopify's Products manual](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products).
{% endhint %}

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Sticky effect

***

The **Sticky effect** makes either the gallery or product details remain at the top of the screen when scrolling down. You may want to enable this option to keep the add-to-cart button visible or keep the product images visible.

* **Sticky gallery** only applies to thumbnail gallery layouts.
* **Sticky product details** applies when the gallery is longer than the product details.
* Select **No sticky effect** to disable this option.

## Media gallery

***

Click the Featured product section to customize the layout of your product media.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Gallery layout</strong></mark></td><td>Change the layout, <strong>size</strong>, <strong>position</strong>, and <strong>shape</strong> of your images</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/xHSCxA4JXppUU1PTbj98">/pages/xHSCxA4JXppUU1PTbj98</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Media grouping</strong></mark></td><td>Reveal images for the selected variant only.</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/VH11cL5rsvxSCaLSYnbH">/pages/VH11cL5rsvxSCaLSYnbH</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Featured product blocks

***

The **Featured product** section contains all the blocks that make up your product form, including product information, variant selectors, buy buttons, and additional feature blocks.

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add block** to insert into the **Featured product**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks, and **hide** or **delete** blocks using the icons.

### Default blocks

***

The **default blocks** show essential product information and purchasing options. Click a block to find its settings.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Title</strong></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Vendor</strong></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>SKU</strong></td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Description</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/uxw9wBof0eQyNvDNNiEh">Change text size</a><br><a href="/pages/uxw9wBof0eQyNvDNNiEh#set-up-description-block">Show as collapsible row</a></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/uxw9wBof0eQyNvDNNiEh">/pages/uxw9wBof0eQyNvDNNiEh</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Price</strong></mark></td><td><p><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG#show-discounts">Show discounts</a></p><p><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG#show-sale-and-sold-out-badges">Sale and sold out badges</a><br><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG#show-sale-and-sold-out-badges">Shop Pay Instalments</a></p></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG">/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Quantity selector</strong></td><td>Show or hide quantity label</td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Variant selector</strong></mark></td><td><p><a href="/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA#variant-selector-style">Choose selector style</a></p><p><a href="/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA#swatches">Show swatches</a></p><p><a href="/pages/4uBlRVxwxgMywTAHMM51">Add info popup</a> (product guide)</p></td><td><a href="/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA">/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Buy buttons</strong></mark></td><td><p><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL#change-button-style">Choose button style</a></p><p><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL#dynamic-checkout-button">Show dynamic checkout buttons</a></p><p><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL#local-pickup-banner">Show pickup availability</a></p></td><td><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL">/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Content blocks

***

Add more blocks with custom content and features to the featured product section.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Collapsible row</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/JXwSFrWS5WBrWKjkJiXK">/pages/JXwSFrWS5WBrWKjkJiXK</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Complementary products</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/wKfSEZOr3mnW5sKVCczG">/pages/wKfSEZOr3mnW5sKVCczG</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom options</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/6I0nlgPMeAiZGNJXUWxg">/pages/6I0nlgPMeAiZGNJXUWxg</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Featured icon with text</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/Ug0RI0DCr5i244UFarCz">/pages/Ug0RI0DCr5i244UFarCz</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Icon with text</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/ykErZ4eoIOQjwRT4yOhb">/pages/ykErZ4eoIOQjwRT4yOhb</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Image</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/g0rogOOuSRCdVEa7prHv">/pages/g0rogOOuSRCdVEa7prHv</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Inventory status</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/7TyZyf4lqbCZOs5nL5kg">/pages/7TyZyf4lqbCZOs5nL5kg</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Popup</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/O9dOcoiSiVJSYwEonE0f">/pages/O9dOcoiSiVJSYwEonE0f</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Product rating</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/BsPF0lvW6wZkEzLm7NW3">/pages/BsPF0lvW6wZkEzLm7NW3</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Share icons</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/ymEUveqYE6JoZvpbGYx6">/pages/ymEUveqYE6JoZvpbGYx6</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Text</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/ifHgmaXAmEhxBJVGq9If">/pages/ifHgmaXAmEhxBJVGq9If</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom Liquid</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/zbbxSdlA7oVIq8PjG1Gq">/pages/zbbxSdlA7oVIq8PjG1Gq</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Grid

{% hint style="info" %}
This section is available in v3.0 and later. Learn how to [update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) to access new features.
{% endhint %}

The **Grid** section displays a flexible collage of images and autoplay videos. Mix and match between different size blocks and reorder them to create a promotional feature or lookbook layout.

<div><figure><img src="/files/3YhtjF1Cw0A6R62EfzgW" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/qQSlpQbGYFzjNVynM4dy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Grid**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

Click the section to add a **section header** and change **section styles** for colors and spacing.

<table data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section header</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Width and Padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up grid items

***

Add **Grid item** blocks with background images or autoplay videos. Create different layouts by reordering the blocks with the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`** and customize the width and height of each block.

* Add background **images** or **autoplay videos**.
* Add **headings** and **buttons** with selected positions
* Change the **width** and **height** of each item

### Add background media

***

Add an image or autoplay video (without sound) as the grid item's background.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Using color overlays</strong></mark></td><td>Learn how to change overlay colors and use gradients.</td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors</a></td><td><a href="/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ">/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Video requirements" %}
For **autoplay videos**, make sure your video files meet the following requirements:

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th width="210"></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Video file type</strong></td><td><code>.mp4</code> or <code>.mov</code><br><br><em>Embedded YouTube or Vimeo videos are not supported</em>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video length</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 15 seconds (Recommended)</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video size</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 10MB (Recommended)</td></tr></tbody></table>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

`Click Grid item block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="187">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate image to display on mobile screens.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Video</mark></td><td>Add a short autoplay video (without sound) to replace the image.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile video</mark></td><td>Upload an alternate video to display on mobile screens.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change width and height

***

Adjust the width and height of each block to create unique layouts.

`Click Grid item block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="204">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Width</mark></td><td>Choose the width of the grid item as a percentage of the section width. Select 33%, 50%, 66%, or 100%.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Height</mark></td><td>For desktop and mobile, change the height of the grid item between 300 to 800 pixel.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add content

***

Add headings, text, and optional button to overlay the grid media.

`Click Grid item block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="204">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content position</mark></td><td>For both desktop and mobile, choose the placement of the headings within the grid item. Select one of nine positions.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text alignment</mark></td><td>For both desktop and mobile</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content width</mark></td><td>Choose to display the content full width or a custom width.<br><br>Select Custom width to set the <strong>maximum content width</strong> between 100 to 900 pixels.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Overline</mark></td><td>Add text to show a small heading above the main heading.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>Add text to show a main heading.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading size</mark></td><td>Change the font size of the heading from small (1) to large (8).</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading tag</mark></td><td>Change the heading tag to modify the page structure. Use H2 to indicate important topics, and use H3-H6 for related topics. Learn how to <a href="https://github.com/fluorescent/kb-horizon/tree/main/general/editing-themes/h1-heading-tags/README.md#replacing-default-h1-headings">replace default H1 headings</a>.<br><br>This option doesn't change the heading's appearance.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add text to show a subheading below the main heading.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text size</mark></td><td>Change the font size of the text from small (1) to large (8).</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button link</mark></td><td>Select or paste a URL for a button. This link applies to the entire grid item if the button label field is blank.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button label</mark></td><td>Enter text to display as the button label. The most effective button labels ask customers to do something (e.g. Join us, Shop now).</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button style</mark></td><td>Change the style of the button. Select Solid, Outline, or Text.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button size</mark></td><td>Change the size of the button to Small or Regular.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Scrolling text

***

Display scrolling text around the edges of grid items.

1. In the grid item block settings, add the **text** you want to show.
2. Then, in the section settings, change the style of scrolling text:

* Use the **Scroll duration** slider to increase or decrease the number of seconds it takes for the content to scroll from beginning to end.
* Choose to scroll content towards the **Left** or **Right**.
* Show an icon and change the text divider

`Click section for settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="184.5">Setting</th><th width="417.5">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable scrolling text</mark></td><td>Toggle on to rotate scrolling text added to grid blocks.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Scroll duration</mark></td><td>Change the number of seconds it takes for the content to scroll from beginning to end.</td><td><strong>5 - 45 secs</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Scroll direction</mark></td><td>Choose the direction of scrolling.</td><td><strong>Left</strong> <em>Default</em><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text divider</mark></td><td>Display an icon or dot between scrolling text blocks.</td><td><strong>Icon</strong><br><strong>Dot</strong><br><strong>None</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Icon</mark></td><td>For the icon text divider, select from 30+ free icons.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Grid spacing

***

Adjust the **grid spacing** between grid blocks on desktop and mobile screens.

`Click section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="202">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop spacing</mark></td><td>For desktop screens, adjust spacing between the grid blocks: between 0 and 60 pixels.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile spacing</mark></td><td>For mobile screens, adjust spacing between the grid blocks: between 0 and 50 pixels6</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Icon with text columns

{% hint style="info" %}
This section is available in v3.0 and later. Learn how to [update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) to access new features.
{% endhint %}

Use the **Icon with text columns** section to display a row of text blocks with icons. You can highlight your company values, process, or key features of your product.

* Add columns with icons, text, and an optional link.
* Change the icon color and size
* Change the layout and alignment

<figure><img src="/files/CgKkAwuXyJe1duaYM8dT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/oKt3GpQIMmhUqyD74fzR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Icon with text columns** Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Section layout

***

In the section settings, you can adjust the overall layout and style of the column blocks.

* Change the icon size and color
* Choose the number of **columns per row**
* Change the amount of **spacing** between columns
* On mobile, display columns as **Stacked** (multiple rows) or **Slider** (single row).

`Click section for settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="358">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Icon color</mark></td><td>Choose an icon color based on the section's color scheme.</td><td><strong>Accent</strong><br><strong>Text</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Icon width</mark></td><td>Adjust the width of the icon for desktop screens.<br><br>Make sure the icon width does not exceed the width of your custom image.</td><td><strong>12 - 74 px</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Icon alignment</mark></td><td>Place the icon above or to the left of the column text.</td><td><strong>Icon above, text center</strong><br><strong>Icon above, text left</strong><br><strong>Icon left, text left</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Columns per row</mark></td><td>Select the number of columns to display on desktop screens.</td><td><strong>2 - 5</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Column spacing</mark></td><td>Choose the amount of spacing between column blocks.</td><td><strong>Small</strong><br><strong>Medium</strong><br><strong>Large</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">(Mobile) Layout</mark></td><td>Display blocks in a Stacked single column or as a single row carousel.</td><td><strong>Stacked</strong><br><strong>Slider</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">(Mobile) Icon width</mark></td><td>Adjust the width of the icon for mobile screens.<br><br>Make sure the icon width does not exceed the width of your custom image.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">(Mobile) Icon alignment</mark></td><td>Place the icon above or to the left of the column text.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add column blocks

***

Add column blocks with **icons, text,** and optional **link**. In the Icon with text columns section, click **(+) Add Column**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to rearrange the blocks. Click the **Column block** to add content.

* Select from 30+ icons or upload a custom icon image
* Add column headings and text
* Make the icon a clickable link

`Click column block for settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="189">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Icon</mark></td><td>Select from 30+ icons to show in the column.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom icon image</mark></td><td><p>Upload your own icon to show in the scrolling content.<br></p><p>We recommend a <code>.png</code> image with a transparent background and minimum dimensions of 50px by 50px.</p></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Icon link</mark></td><td>Add a link to redirect visitors when they click the icon.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>Add text as the column title.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add multiple lines of text below the heading.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Image hero

{% hint style="info" %}
The Image hero section was added in v1.2.0 — [Update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) to access new features.
{% endhint %}

The **Image hero** section displays a large image banner with overlaid headings, text, and buttons.

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Image hero**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="#section-colors">#section-colors</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up hero image

***

Upload an **Image** and adjust its **Height**, **Focal point**, and color **Overlay** or **Gradient**. Add a **Mobile-specific image** for the best results on smaller screens.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Using color overlays</strong></mark></td><td>Learn how to change overlay colors and use gradients.</td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors</a></td><td><a href="/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ">/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

`Click Image hero section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="167">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image to display as the hero image.<br><br>There are no required images dimensions. We simply recommend uploaded images have a minimum width of <strong><code>2500px</code></strong> for optimal quality across all devices.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate image to display on mobile devices.<br><br>You may want a different image that works best with mobile screen dimensions, for example a portrait shaped image.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background link</mark></td><td>Select a page or URL to make the entire image a clickable link.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image animation</mark></td><td>Change the animation style of how the image loads. The image can gradually fade into view or be revealed by an <strong>iris swipe</strong>, which appears as a growing circle. Set to <strong>None</strong> to disable animations.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Set image height

***

Under **Image height**, choose to display the image with a **Fixed** or **Relative** height.

* **Fixed** heights maintain the same pixel height on all screens.
* **Relative** heights adapt the image height as a percentage of the screen height.

`Click Image hero section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="160">Setting</th><th width="422">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop height</mark></td><td>Set the section height to a fixed height (in pixels) or relative height (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td><strong>Fixed height</strong><br>250 - 750px<br><strong>Relative height</strong><br>50 - 100%<br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 650px</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile height</mark></td><td>Choose a fixed height (in pixels) or relative height (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td><strong>Fixed height</strong><br>150 - 750px<br><strong>Relative height</strong><br>50 - 100%<br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 450px</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add content blocks

***

Click **(+) Add block** to add text and image content to the section. Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks, and add **Spacer** and **Divider** blocks to further customize the layout.

<div><figure><img src="/files/y6QvuNTjUyDpm7r7AO5y" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/ilLCbPLKSa8N4nzH3WMB" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Overline</strong></mark></td><td>Add small label heading.</td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Heading</strong></mark></td><td>Add title heading.</td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Text</strong></mark></td><td>Add multiple lines of rich text.</td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Button</strong></mark></td><td>Add buttons with custom styles.</td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Image</strong></mark></td><td>Add images with custom sizes.</td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Spacer</strong></mark></td><td>Add space between blocks.</td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Divider</strong></mark></td><td>Add border between blocks.</td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom Liquid</strong></mark></td><td>Add Liquid code block.</td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change content layout

***

Change the **position** and **width** of the content blocks that overlay the image.

`Click Image hero section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="175">Setting</th><th width="323">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content width</mark></td><td>Use the sliders to set the maximum width (in pixels) of the section content.</td><td><strong>200 - 1000 px</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 500</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text position</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for desktop screens.</td><td><strong>Top / Middle / Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left / Center / Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile text position</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for mobile screens.</td><td><strong>Top / Middle / Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left / Center / Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Section colors

***

The section uses two color schemes. The first color scheme applies a section **background** color, and the **overlay** color scheme applies text, button, and overlay tint colors.

### Change background color

***

The section background is visible when the section has **top and bottom** **padding** or when the section width is **page width** or **full width padded**.

In the section settings, select a **color scheme** (at the top of the settings panel) to apply its background color. You can edit the color scheme in your theme settings.


# Image with text

Use the **Image with text** section to combine a feature image side-by-side with promotional text and button. With a flexible layout and optional content blocks, you can achieve a wide variety of looks.

* Add a featured **Image** and **Content blocks**.
* Customize the **layout** and change the **container color** for alternate looks.

> Check out the related [Video with text section](/eclipse/sections/video-with-text).

<div><figure><img src="/files/wW7J1WsxvTn45SeWmm47" alt=""><figcaption><p>Image with text</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/JKTXGxErRkvDohJsLrIj" alt=""><figcaption><p>Section with container color</p></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Image with text**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up image

***

* Add a feature **image** and alternate **mobile image**.
* Change the **image aspect ratio** (shape)
* Make the image a clickable **link** to another page.

`Click Image with text section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="174">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate image to display on mobile devices.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Crop the image to a uniform shape, or select Natural to maintain its original shape. "Aspect ratio" refers to the proportion between the image's width and height (W:H).</td><td><strong>Natural</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Portrait (2:3)</strong><br><strong>Portrait (4:5)</strong><br><strong>Square (1:1)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (5:4)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (3:2)</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image link</mark></td><td>The page or URL that you want the link to go to. Visitors are redirected when they click the image.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change image layout

***

After uploading an image, adjust the **width** and **position**. Use the **Breathing room** option to add space around the image.

`Click Image with text section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="170">Setting</th><th width="347">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop image width</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width of the image on desktop.</td><td><strong>35 - 70</strong> %<br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 50</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop image position</mark></td><td>Position the image to the left or right of the text content.</td><td><strong>Left of content</strong><br><strong>Right of content</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image position</mark></td><td>On mobile, show the image before or after the text.</td><td><strong>Image first</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Image second</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image breathing room</mark></td><td>Use the slider to add spacing around the image. Set the slider to 0 to display the image at the full width and height of the image area.</td><td><strong>0-60</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 0</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add content blocks

***

Click **(+) Add block** to add text and image content to the section. Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks, and add **Spacer** and **Divider** blocks to further customize the layout.

<div><figure><img src="/files/y6QvuNTjUyDpm7r7AO5y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/ilLCbPLKSa8N4nzH3WMB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Heading</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Overline text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Button</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Image</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Spacer</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Divider</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom Liquid</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change content layout

***

Change the width and alignment of all content blocks.

`Click Image with text section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content width</mark></td><td>Display the section at full width of the screen or set a custom width.<br><br>Under <em>Section</em>, you can also set the section width.</td><td><strong>Full width</strong><br><strong>Custom width</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom width</mark></td><td>Use the sliders to set the maximum width (in pixels) of the section content.</td><td><strong>200 - 1000 px</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content position</mark></td><td>For both desktop and mobile, choose the placement of the headings within the grid item. Select one of nine positions.<br><br>The horizontal and vertical placement applies when there's enough room in the content area.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text alignment</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for desktop screens.</td><td><strong>Left</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Center</strong><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change container color

***

Change the **Container color scheme** to show a background color for the content area.

You can add and define different color schemes in Theme settings > Colors. [Learn more](/eclipse/sections/overview/section-styles#section-colors)


# Multi-column

The **Multi-column** section allows you to pair images, text, and buttons in a flexible layout. You can display multiple columns in a **grid** or a single-row **slider**.

* Add multiple columns with images, autoplay videos, text, and/or buttons.
* Customize the shape, size, and position of images and videos
* Change the alignment of text and buttons

{% hint style="info" %}
You can add different combinations of content for the columns. For example, add columns of images (without text) or only text (without images).
{% endhint %}

<div><figure><img src="/files/rYVWFTvOstjX3Tm5ZgLA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/er3r7s6odc9Mmgxb8bgz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Multi-column**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

Click the section to add a **section header** and change **section styles** for colors and spacing.

<table data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section header</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Width and Padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Section layout

***

In the section settings, you can adjust the overall layout of the column blocks.

* Choose the **number of columns** to display per row
* Change the amount of **spacing** between columns
* Display columns in a **Grid** (multiple rows) or **Slider** (single row)

`Click section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="402">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Column spacing</mark></td><td>Choose the amount of spacing between column blocks.</td><td><strong>Small</strong><br><strong>Medium</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Large</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of columns on desktop</mark></td><td>Select the number of columns to display on desktop screens.</td><td><strong>2</strong><br><strong>3</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>4</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of columns on mobile</mark></td><td>Select the number of columns per row on mobile screens.</td><td><strong>1</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>2</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable slider on desktop</mark></td><td>When enabled, columns appear in a single row with scroll buttons.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable slider on mobile</mark></td><td>When enabled, columns appear in a single row with scroll buttons. Visitors can also swipe to scroll through.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show slider indicator</mark></td><td>When enabled, a bar below the columns shows how far visitors have scrolled.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add column blocks

***

Add column blocks with **images**, **videos**, **text**, and/or **buttons**.

* In the Multi-column section, click **(+) Add Column**.
* Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to rearrange the blocks.
* Click the **Column block** to add content.

{% hint style="info" %}
You can show columns with only images or videos by deleting the columns **text** and **heading** fields. You can show columns with only text by deselecting the **Display media** option.
{% endhint %}

### Add image or video

***

Add an image or autoplay video (without sound) as the column background.

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Video requirements" %}
For **autoplay videos**, make sure your video files meet the following requirements:

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th width="210"></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Video file type</strong></td><td><code>.mp4</code> or <code>.mov</code><br><br><em>Embedded YouTube or Vimeo videos are not supported</em>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video length</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 20 seconds (Recommended)</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video size</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 10MB (Recommended)</td></tr></tbody></table>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

`Click Column block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="187">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Display media</mark></td><td>Uncheck this option for columns blocks without an image or video.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Make media full height</mark></td><td>If the column block only has an image or video without any text or button, checking this option will make the image or video span the full height of the row.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Video</mark></td><td>Add a short autoplay video (without sound) to replace the image.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate image to display on mobile devices.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add heading and text

***

Change the **Heading** and **Text** in the column block, or delete the text in these fields to remove them.

`Click Column block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="170">Setting</th><th width="403">Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of the column.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add multiple lines of rich text. Use the buttons to make the text bold or italicized, or to add a link.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add button

***

Add a link and label for the column button. To remove the button, delete the text in the **Button label** field.

`Click Column block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="166">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button link</mark></td><td>The URL that you want the button to link to.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button label</mark></td><td>The text that displays on the button.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "Button"</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Customize column styles

***

Change the overall style of **text**, **buttons**, and **media** of all column blocks.

### Change text layout and size

***

Change the **alignment** and **size** of column text and headings.

`Click Multi-column section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="162">Setting</th><th width="433">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text alignment</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for desktop screens.</td><td><strong>Left</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Center</strong><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading size</mark></td><td>Change the size of the heading text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1-8</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 2</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading tag</mark></td><td>Change the heading tag to modify the page structure. Use H2 to indicate important topics, and use H3-H6 for related topics.<br><br>This option doesn't change the heading's appearance.</td><td><strong>H2 - H6</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text size</mark></td><td>Adjust the size of the section text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1-8</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 3</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Choose button style

***

Change the visual style of column buttons. The button colors use the selected **color scheme** in the section settings.

<figure><img src="/files/hMTnCgtQUV93hUWksqUA" alt="" width="515"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Multi-column section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="166">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button style</mark></td><td>Change the style of the button.</td><td><strong>Solid</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Outline</strong><br><strong>Text</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change image and video layout

***

Change the **aspect ratio** (shape) and **position** of all column images and videos.

`Click Multi-column section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="179">Setting</th><th width="356">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Media aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Select an <strong>aspect ratio</strong> to crop images to be a uniform shape, or select <strong>Natural</strong> to display images in their original shape.</td><td><strong>Natural</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Portrait (2:3)</strong><br><strong>Portrait (4:5)</strong><br><strong>Square (1:1)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (5:4)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (3:2)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (16:9)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (21:9)</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Media position</mark></td><td>Show the image or video above or below the column content.</td><td><strong>Above content</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Below content</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Newsletter

Add the **Newsletter** section to display an email sign-up form with an optional banner image.

{% hint style="success" %}
Newsletter subscribers are added to your "accepts marketing" [Customers](https://shopify.com/admin/customers?query=\&accepts_marketing=1) list. You can learn more about managing customer emails in Shopify's guides for [Email subscriber lists](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/promoting-marketing/create-marketing/shopify-email/email-subscriber-list-management) and [Email marketing](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/promoting-marketing/create-marketing/shopify-email).
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/PRg1wlvDYhvptYbPTLb6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Newsletter**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add background image

***

Add and customize the background image for your email signup section.

`Click Newsletter section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="118">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image to display as the background of the banner.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add image overlay

***

The image **overlay** adds a layer of color to your image. Overlays help balance image and text for clarity and readability.

* Choose a **Color scheme** for the overlay and overlay text
* Change the **Opacity** to make the overlay more or less transparent

`Click Newsletter section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Overlay opacity</mark></td><td>Use the slider to change the transparency of the overlay.<br><br>Set the opacity to 0% to turn off the overlay.</td><td><strong>0-100</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 40</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Set banner height

***

`Click Newsletter section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Banner height</mark></td><td>Change the maximum height of the banner. The Adapt to image option sets the banner height to the full height of your image, which avoids cropping.</td><td><strong>Adapt to image</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Custom</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom desktop height</mark></td><td>For desktop, set the Custom banner height to a <strong>fixed height</strong> (in pixels) or <strong>relative height</strong> (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td>Fixed height<br><strong>250 - 750px</strong><br>Relative height<br><strong>50 - 100%</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 450px</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom mobile height</mark></td><td>For mobile, set the Custom banner height to a <strong>fixed height</strong> (in pixels) or <strong>relative height</strong> (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td>Fixed height<br><strong>150 - 750px</strong><br>Relative height<br><strong>50 - 100%</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 450px</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change image animation

***

Add animation effects to your image banner.

`Click Newsletter section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image banner transition</mark></td><td>Change the animation style of how the image loads. The image can gradually fade into view or be revealed by an iris swipe, which appears as a growing circle. Set to None to disable animations.</td><td><strong>None</strong><br><strong>Fade</strong><br><strong>Iris wipe</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add content blocks

***

Click **(+) Add block** to add text and image content to the section. Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks, and add **Spacer** and **Divider** blocks to further customize the layout.

<div><figure><img src="/files/y6QvuNTjUyDpm7r7AO5y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/ilLCbPLKSa8N4nzH3WMB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Heading</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Overline text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Image</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Spacer</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Divider</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change text alignment

***

`Click Newsletter section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="336">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text alignment</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for desktop screens.</td><td><strong>Top / Middle / Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left / Center / Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Collect customer names

***

In the **Email form**, you can choose to show required fields for the customer's first and last name.

{% hint style="info" %}
This option was added in [v5.1.0](https://help.fluorescent.co/eclipse/sections/pages/Di96NGkvSFpr2vzlTBuY#id-5.1.0-latest-release) — Learn how to [update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) to access the latest features.
{% endhint %}

`Click Email form block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="207.48028564453125">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Collect customer name</mark></td><td>Enable option to show required fields for the customer's first and last name.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Edit default wording

***

The **Newsletter form** includes default text for the submit button ("Subscribe"), email placeholder ("Your email"), and confirmation message ("Thanks for subscribing!"). You can edit this text in the default theme content editor.

* In your theme editor, click the **Actions (**<kbd>**...**</kbd>**)** button and select **Edit default theme content**.
* Search "Newsletter" to find the default text under **General >** **Newsletter form**.
* Replace the default text in the field and click **Save**.


# Quotes

Use the **Quotes** section to prominently display rotating quotes about your store or products from customers, partners, or the media.

<div><figure><img src="/files/edTJ40qrjwT4RmKfexNH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/i06aPm9B48jLrtjHGrgA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/7xYWIxTBDjLokjoYt4vC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Quotes**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### <mark style="color:$primary;">Section styles</mark>

Click the section to add a **section header** and change **section styles** for colors and spacing.

<table data-view="cards" data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section header</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Width and Padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add quote blocks

***

Add **Quote blocks** with quote text, author names, and logo images. You can adjust the font size of the quote text.

If you add more than one quote block, they will auto-rotate by default. To change the time between quotes or stop quotes from quote blocks from automating, see the **Quotes auto-rotate settings**.

Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks.

<sub><mark style="color:$info;">Click Quote block to find settings<mark style="color:$info;"></sub>

<table><thead><tr><th width="210">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Quote</mark></td><td>Enter the text of the quote.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Author</mark></td><td>Enter the name of the person being quoted.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload a small logo image above the quote text. This image might be the logo of a company or profile picture. We recommend a small square image between 70 to 200px.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image size</mark></td><td>Set the maximum image width between 50 to 100px</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show rating</mark></td><td>Choose to show a star rating given by the author.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Rating</mark></td><td>Set the rating between 0 and 5 stars.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Quote styles

***

Change the text size and font, alignment, and quotation mark icon.

<sub><mark style="color:$info;">Click section to find settings<mark style="color:$info;"></sub>

<table><thead><tr><th width="257">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show quotation mark icon</mark></td><td>Display a quotation <code>"</code> icon above the quote text.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Quotation mark icon color</mark></td><td>Set the icon color to <strong>Accent</strong>, <strong>Text</strong>, or <strong>Light text</strong>.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Quote text size</mark></td><td>Change the text size from small to large (1 - 8).</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Quote text line height</mark></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text alignment</mark></td><td>Align the quote content to the <strong>Left</strong>, <strong>Center</strong>, or <strong>Right</strong>.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Quote tag</mark></td><td>Change the heading tag to modify the page structure. Use H2 to indicate important topics, and use H3-H6 for related topics. Learn how to <a href="https://github.com/fluorescent/kb-horizon/tree/main/general/editing-themes/h1-heading-tags/README.md#replacing-default-h1-headings">replace default H1 headings</a>.<br><br>This option doesn't change the heading's appearance.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Auto-rotate quotes

***

By default, multiple quotes will auto-rotate every 6 seconds.

**Set time between quotes**

Display each quote between **4** to **20** seconds. Quotes with more words may need more time for customers to read them.

**Turn off autoplay**

If you turn off autoplay, the Quotes section displays pagination dots to let customers click through at their own pace.

> Turning off autoplay can make your online store accessible to more customers, including people with disabilities. Learn more about [accessibility for themes](https://help.fluorescent.co/stiletto/general/editing-themes/accessibility) to help make the web inclusive and usable for everyone.


# Rich text

Use the **Rich text** section to add formatted text with additional images and buttons.

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Rich text**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add content blocks

***

Click **(+) Add block** to add text and image content to the section. Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks, and add **Spacer** and **Divider** blocks to further customize the layout.

<div><figure><img src="/files/y6QvuNTjUyDpm7r7AO5y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/ilLCbPLKSa8N4nzH3WMB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Heading</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Overline text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Button</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Image</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Spacer</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Divider</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom Liquid</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change content layout

***

Change the width and alignment of the section content. You can also change the section width.

`Click Rich text section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="171">Setting</th><th width="361">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content width</mark></td><td>Display the section at full width of the page or set a custom width. Under <em>Section</em>, you can also set the section width.</td><td><strong>Full width</strong><br><strong>Custom width</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom content width</mark></td><td>Use the sliders to set the maximum width (in pixels) of the section content.</td><td><strong>400-1000 px</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content alignment</mark></td><td>The position of the headings, buttons, and content within the section.</td><td><strong>Left</strong><br><strong>Center</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Scrolling content

{% hint style="info" %}
Scrolling content was added in v1.2.0 — Learn how to [update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) to access new features.
{% endhint %}

The **Scrolling content** section displays a banner with moving text, images, and icons. Use this section for eye-catching promotions and store updates.

* Add scrolling **text**, **images**, and **icons** with optional links
* Add **highlighted text**
* Control the **duration** and **direction** of scrolling

<figure><img src="/files/Z437bCy5TlCMCDbpz4wv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Scrolling content**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Content blocks

***

Add **Text**, **Image**, and **Icon** blocks to show as the scrolling content. You can add multiple blocks of the same type.

* Under the **Scrolling content** section, click **(+) Add block**.
* Use the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`** to rearrange the blocks.
* Click a block to edit content and settings.

## Text block

***

Add scrolling **text** with an optional link. Click **(+) Add block** to create more text blocks. Click the block to:

* Enter text for a scrolling message
* Make the text block a clickable link
* Highlight part of the text with an accent color

In the section settings, you can change the font, text size, and colors of text blocks.

### Add text link

***

In the **Text link** field, add a link to apply to the entire text block.

{% hint style="warning" %}
If you've added a **Text link**, do not apply linked text to the content. Using the rich formatting buttons to remove any linked text.
{% endhint %}

### Add highlighted text

***

Highlight a word or words within the text block. With **Enable highlighting** toggled, enter pipe characters (`|`) on either side of the words you want to highlight. For example: `|text|`

Highlighted text uses the **Accent** color of the section's selected color scheme.

`Click text block for settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="171">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Enter text to show in the scrolling content.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text link</mark></td><td>Add a link to redirect visitors when they click the text block. If enabled, do not apply linked text to the content using the rich formatting buttons.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable highlighting</mark></td><td>When enabled, wrap text with pipe characters (<code>| text |</code>) to apply the accent color.</td></tr></tbody></table>

`Click section for settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="170.5">Setting</th><th width="408.5">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text style</mark></td><td>Choose the font for the text blocks, based on your theme settings.</td><td><strong>Heading</strong> <em>Default</em><br><strong>Body</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text size</mark></td><td>For desktop screens, change the font size for all text blocks.</td><td><strong>1 - 8</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile text size</mark></td><td>For mobile screens, change the font size for all text blocks.</td><td><strong>1 - 8</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Image block

***

Add a scrolling **image** with optional link. Click **(+) Add block** to create more image blocks. Click the block to:

* Upload a custom image
* Change the image size
* Make the image a clickable link.

`Click image block for settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="170">Setting</th><th width="432.5">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td><p>Select or upload an image.</p><p>We recommend a <code>.png</code> image with a transparent background and minimum dimensions of 50px by 50px.</p></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image size</mark></td><td>Adjust the width of the image for desktop screens.<br><br>Make sure the image size does not exceed the width of your uploaded image.</td><td><strong>20 - 500 px</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image size</mark></td><td>Adjust the width of the image for mobile screens.</td><td><strong>20 - 350 px</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image link</mark></td><td>Add a link to redirect visitors when they click the image.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Icon block

***

Add a scrolling **icon** with an optional link. Click **(+) Add block** to create more icon blocks. Click the block to:

* Select from 30+ icons or upload a custom icon image
* Change the icon size and color
* Make the icon a clickable link.

`Click icon block for settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="136">Setting</th><th width="437">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Icon</mark></td><td>Select from 30+ icons to show in the scrolling content.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom icon image</mark></td><td><p>Upload your own icon to show in the scrolling content.<br></p><p>We recommend a <code>.png</code> image with a transparent background and minimum dimensions of 50px by 50px.</p></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Icon width</mark></td><td>Increase or decrease the width of the icon for desktop screens.<br><br>Make sure the icon width does not exceed the width of your custom image.</td><td><strong>1 - 75 px</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile icon width</mark></td><td>Increase or decrease the width of the icon for mobile screens.</td><td><strong>1 - 75 px</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Icon color</mark></td><td>Choose an icon color based on the section's color scheme.</td><td><strong>Accent</strong> <em>Default</em><br><strong>Text</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Icon link</mark></td><td>Add a link to redirect visitors when they click the icon.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Scrolling behavior

***

In the section settings, change the **duration** (speed) and **direction** of scrolling.

* Use the **Scroll duration** slider to increase or decrease the number of seconds it takes for the content to scroll from beginning to end.
* Choose to scroll content towards the **Left** or **Right**.

`Click section for settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="159.5">Setting</th><th width="410.5">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Scroll duration</mark></td><td>Change the number of seconds it takes for the content to scroll from beginning to end.</td><td><strong>5 - 45 secs</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Scroll direction</mark></td><td>Choose the direction of scrolling.</td><td><strong>Left</strong> <em>Default</em><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Gap between blocks

***

After adding the blocks, you can increase or decrease the space between content blocks.

`Click section for settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="168">Setting</th><th width="362">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Gap</mark></td><td>For desktop screens, adjust the space between content blocks.</td><td><strong>0 - 100 px</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile gap</mark></td><td>For mobile screens, adjust the space between content blocks.</td><td><strong>0 - 100 px</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Shop the look

{% hint style="info" %}
Shop the look is available in v3.0 and later. Learn how to [update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme).
{% endhint %}

Use the **Shop the look** section to showcase multiple products that go together next to a featured image or video that displays them in context. With quick shop enabled, customers can add directly to their cart.

* Add a featured image or autoplay video
* Add overlay text content
* Display products as a list or grid

<div><figure><img src="/files/IeLNbmlCjgLh1llB2A0S" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/72l9PuyP30hX0Ghuf7vY" alt="" width="102"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Shop the look**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up featured media

***

Add an image or autoplay video (without sound) as the featured media. Use media that shows all the products being showcased.

After uploading your media, you can select the **focal point** of your media and add a **color overlay**.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Using color overlays</strong></mark></td><td>Learn how to change overlay colors and use gradients.</td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors</a></td><td><a href="/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ">/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Video requirements" %}
For **autoplay videos**, make sure your video files meet the following requirements:

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th width="180"></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Video file type</strong></td><td><code>.mp4</code> or <code>.mov</code><br><br><em>Embedded YouTube or Vimeo videos are not supported</em>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video length</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 20 seconds (Recommended)</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video size</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 10MB (Recommended)</td></tr></tbody></table>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

`Click section for settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="175">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop media size</mark></td><td>Change the width of the featured media as a percentage of the section width.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Media position</mark></td><td>Place media on the <strong>Left of products</strong> or <strong>Right of products</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Sticky media on scroll</mark></td><td>Fix the feature media to the top of the window when scrolling down to view products.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate image to display on mobile devices.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Video</mark></td><td>Add a short autoplay video (without sound) to replace the image.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile video</mark></td><td>Add an alternate autoplay video that appears on mobile screens.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Video focal point</mark></td><td>For desktop and mobile, specify the main focus of the video. The focal point will remain centered and within frame to avoid unwanted cropping.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Aspect ratio</mark></td><td>For desktop and mobile, select an <strong>aspect ratio</strong> to crop the media to be a uniform shape, or select <strong>Natural</strong> to display media in their original shape.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Color scheme</mark></td><td>Select the color scheme to apply as the overlay colors.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Overlay opacity</mark></td><td>Use the slider to change the transparency of the overlay.<br><br>Set the opacity to 0% to turn off the overlay.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add overlay content

***

After adding an image or video, add **headings**, **text**, and **buttons**. You can adjust the **text size** and change the **position** of the content.

`Click section for settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="148">Setting</th><th width="425">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Overline</mark></td><td>Add small heading text.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>Add main heading text.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading size</mark></td><td>Change the size of the heading from small to large.</td><td><strong>1-8</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading tag</mark></td><td>Change the heading tag to modify the page structure. Use H2 to indicate important topics, and use H3-H6 for related topics. Learn how to <a href="https://github.com/fluorescent/kb-horizon/tree/main/general/editing-themes/h1-heading-tags/README.md#replacing-default-h1-headings">replace default H1 headings</a>.<br><br>This option doesn't change the heading's appearance.</td><td><strong>H1 - H6</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add multiple lines of rich text. Use the buttons to make the text bold or italicized, or to add a link.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text size</mark></td><td>Change the size of the text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1-8</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button link</mark></td><td>The URL that you want the button to link to.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button label</mark></td><td>The text that displays on the button.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button style</mark></td><td>Change the style of the button.</td><td><strong>Solid</strong><br><strong>Outline</strong><br><strong>Text</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text position</mark></td><td>Set the position of the overlay content for desktop screens.</td><td><strong>Top / Middle / Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left / Center / Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile text position</mark></td><td>Set the position of the overlay content for mobile screens.</td><td><strong>Top / Middle / Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left / Center / Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add products

***

Click **(+) Add product** and select the product that you want to feature. You can add a **custom image** to replace the default product images.

Product items within the drawer

### Change products layout

***

In the section settings, change the **heading** above the products, choose to show the product **vendor** names, and change the **image aspect ratio**.

Change the products layout to a **list** or **grid**. If you have if you have more than 4 products, we recommend using grid and enabling **Slider on mobile**.

`Click section for settings`

<table data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th width="188">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>Add text above the products.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show vendor</mark></td><td>Show the product vendor name above the product titles.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Select an <strong>aspect ratio</strong> to crop product images to be a uniform shape, or select <strong>Natural</strong> to display images in their original shape.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Products layout</mark></td><td>Display product items as a <strong>list</strong> or <strong>grid</strong>.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable slider on mobile</mark></td><td>Display products as a single row slider. Toggle off to display products as stacked column with multiple rows.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Shoppable feed

{% hint style="info" %}
Shoppable feed is available in v4.0 and later. Learn how to [update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme).
{% endhint %}

The **Shoppable feed** section allows customers to shop multiple ‘looks’ directly from a gallery of images. Add images to showcase multiple products that pair well together, which customers can quickly view and buy in a ‘shop the look’ drawer.

<figure><img src="/files/aW2sinTeSmLPVlT9hgcR" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Shoppable feed**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit the **Header** and general **section styles** for colors, width, and spacing:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section header</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-header</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Section layout

***

In the section settings, you can adjust the overall layout of the shoppable images

* Display images in a **Grid** (multiple rows) or **Slider** (single row)
* Select the **number of columns** to show per row
* Choose to show the slider indicator bar

<figure><img src="/files/YzKigiCuvWY2yfTcCZoy" alt="" width="375"><figcaption><p>Grid layout</p></figcaption></figure>

`Click section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="385">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Layout</mark></td><td>Display shoppable feed items in multiple rows (grid) or in a single row slider that visitors rotate through.</td><td><strong>Slider</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Grid</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show slider indicator</mark></td><td>When enabled, a bar below the slider that shows how far visitors have scrolled.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of columns on desktop</mark></td><td>Select the number of images per row on desktop screens.</td><td><strong>2</strong><br><strong>3</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>4</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Number of columns on mobile</mark></td><td>Select the number of images per row on mobile screens.</td><td><strong>1</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>2</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add shoppable feed items

***

The **Shoppable feed items** are image cards that open a list of products that customers can view and purchase. Click a block to set up a shoppable item:

* Add an image that showcases multiple products that pair well together
* Select the products to show in the 'Shop the look' drawer

The uploaded image will appear in the section gallery and at the top of the "Shop the look" drawer.

`Click Shoppable feed item block for settings`

<table data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th width="188">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image that shows the products.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Products</mark></td><td>Select the products that will appear in the 'shop the look' drawer</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change shop button icon

***

In the section settings, you can select the **Shop button icon** that overlays the image card.

<table data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th width="188">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Shop button icon</mark></td><td>Select the <strong>Bag</strong> or <strong>Cart icon</strong> for the Shop button.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change image ratio (shape)

***

The **Image aspect ratio** setting lets you crop your uploaded images to make them all **Square (1:1)**, **Landscape (3:2)**, or **Portrait (2:3)**. You can select the **Natural** option to show all images with their original orientation.

In the section settings, select an image ratio for both the card images and drawer images. By default, the image ratio uses your theme settings.

{% hint style="warning" %}

### **Use consistent image ratios**

If you select the **natural** aspect ratio, it's important that your images use the same image ratio. Using images with varying image ratios (for example, landscape and portrait) can affect the layout of the section.

Check out [Shopify's guide for the image editor](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/shopify-admin/productivity-tools/media-editor#crop-an-image) to learn how to crop images to have the same ratio.
{% endhint %}

<details>

<summary>What are aspect ratios?</summary>

The **aspect ratio** describes the relation between the image width (w) and height (h). An image that's 400px by 200px has an aspect ratio of **2:1** because its width is twice as large as its height. Square images have an aspect ratio of **1:1** because the width and height are equal.

<img src="/files/c18Y9JViI7ouryyknY77" alt="" data-size="original">

</details>

`Click section for settings`

<table data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th width="199.5">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Card image aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Select an <strong>aspect ratio</strong> to crop card images to be a uniform shape, or select <strong>Natural</strong> to display images in their original shape.<br><br>For <strong>Natural</strong>, we recommend using images that have the same aspect ratio or shape.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Drawer image aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Select an <strong>aspect ratio</strong> to crop the images in the 'shop the look' drawer to be a uniform shape, or select <strong>Natural</strong> to display images in their original shape.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Product shop now link

***

In the drawer, the "Shop now" links can either open the product page or the Quick view popup, allowing customers to add the products directly to their cart.

For "Quick view", make sure **Quick shopping** is enabled in **Theme settings > Product listings.**

`Click section for settings`

<table data-full-width="false"><thead><tr><th width="188">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show vendor</mark></td><td>Show the product vendor name above the product titles.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Shop now link action</mark></td><td>When the "Shop now" link is clicked, choose to direct customers to the product page or open "Quick view" to allow them to add the products directly to their cart.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Slideshow

The **Slideshow** displays auto-rotating slides with images and autoplay videos (without sound). You can fine-tune how your images look, all slide headings and colors, and add a mobile-specific image for the best experience across all devices.

<figure><img src="/files/YeWK2PThP3vjdIUV06ih" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Slideshow**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="#section-colors">#section-colors</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up slideshow

***

### Autoplay slides

By default, multiple slides will auto-rotate every 6 seconds. You can change the **time between slides** or **disable autoplay** to let visitors rotate through slides with the pagination buttons.

`Click Slideshow section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable autoplay</mark></td><td>When checked, slides will auto-rotate.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Time between slides</mark></td><td>Set the number of seconds to show each slide before auto-rotating.</td><td><strong>4 - 20</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 6</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Choose height

Choose a **fixed height** to make the slideshow the exact same height on all screen sizes. Choose a **relative height** to have slides adapt their height to a certain percentage of the screen height.

`Click Slideshow section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop height</mark></td><td>Set the section height to a fixed height (in pixels) or relative height (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td><strong>Fixed height</strong><br>250 - 750px<br><strong>Relative height</strong><br>50 - 100%<br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 650px</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile height</mark></td><td>Set the section height to a fixed height (in pixels) or relative height (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td><strong>Fixed height</strong><br>150 - 750px<br><strong>Relative height</strong><br>50 - 100%<br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 450px</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Customize pagination

Change the **alignment** and **colors** of the navigation buttons for moving to the next or previous slides.

`Click Slideshow section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Alignment</mark></td><td>Position the slide navigation buttons to the left, center, or right.</td><td><strong>Left</strong><br><strong>Center</strong><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background</mark></td><td>Change the color behind the slide pagination buttons.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Foreground</mark></td><td>Change the color of the slide pagination buttons.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background opacity</mark></td><td>Use the slider to adjust the transparency of the background. Set the opacity to 0% to hide the background. If set to 100%, the background will be a solid color.</td><td><strong>0 - 100</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 50</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Choose slide animation

The slideshow uses animations for revealing the the text and slides as they rotate.

`Click Slideshow section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable text animation</mark></td><td>When enabled, headings and text slide up and fade into view upon loading.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Slide animation</mark></td><td>Change the animation style of how the image loads. The image can gradually fade into view or be revealed by an iris swipe, which appears as a growing circle. Set to None to disable animations.</td><td><strong>None</strong><br><strong>Fade</strong><br><strong>Iris wipe</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add image or video slide

***

Use the **Image slide** block to display an image as the slide background. The **Video slide** displays an autoplay video (without sound) as the slide background. Add headings, text, and an optional button.

After uploading your media, you can select the **focal point** of your video and add a **color overlay**.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Using color overlays</strong></mark></td><td>Learn how to change overlay colors and use gradients.</td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors</a></td><td><a href="/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ">/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Video requirements" %}
For **autoplay videos**, make sure your video files meet the following requirements:

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th width="180"></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Video file type</strong></td><td><code>.mp4</code> or <code>.mov</code><br><br><em>Embedded YouTube or Vimeo videos are not supported</em>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video length</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 20 seconds (Recommended)</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video size</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 10MB (Recommended)</td></tr></tbody></table>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

`Click Video slide block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Shopify video</mark></td><td>Select or upload a video that autoplays (without sound).</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile Shopify video</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate video to show on mobile devices.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Video focal point</mark></td><td>Specify the main focus of the video. The focal point will remain centered and within frame to avoid unwanted cropping.</td><td><strong>Center</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Top</strong><br><strong>Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left</strong><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show overlay</mark></td><td>Add a color tint to the image.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Overlay opacity</mark></td><td>Use the slider to change the transparency of the overlay. Set the opacity to 0% to turn off the overlay. Set to 100% to display a solid color (instead of the image).</td><td><strong>0-100</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 20</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

`Click Image slide block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image to display as the background of the banner.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate image to display on mobile devices.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up slide content

***

After adding an image or video, add **headings**, **text**, and **buttons**. You can adjust the **text size** and change the **alignment** of the slide content.

`Click Slide block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="341">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content width</mark></td><td>Use the sliders to set the maximum width (in pixels) of the section content.</td><td><strong>200 - 1000 px</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 500</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text position</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for desktop screens.</td><td><strong>Top / Middle / Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left / Center / Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile text position</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for mobile screens.</td><td><strong>Top / Middle / Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left / Center / Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Overline</mark></td><td>The small text above the heading.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: "Overline"</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of the slide.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: "Slide Heading"</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading size</mark></td><td>Change the size of the heading text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1-8</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 8</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading tag</mark></td><td>Change the heading tag to modify the page structure. Use H2 to indicate important topics, and use H3-H6 for related topics. Learn how to <a href="https://github.com/fluorescent/kb-horizon/tree/main/general/editing-themes/h1-heading-tags/README.md#replacing-default-h1-headings">replace default H1 headings</a>.<br><br>This option doesn't change the heading's appearance.</td><td><strong>H1 - H6</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add multiple lines of rich text. Use the buttons to make the text bold or italicized, or to add a link.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: "Tell your brand's story through images"</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text size</mark></td><td>Adjust the size of the section text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1-8</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 3</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button link</mark></td><td>The URL that you want the button to link to.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button label</mark></td><td>The text that displays on the button.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Button</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Button style</mark></td><td>Change the style of the button.</td><td><strong>Solid</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Outline</strong><br><strong>Text</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Section colors

***

The section uses two color schemes. The first color scheme applies a section **background** color, and the **overlay** color scheme applies text, button, and overlay tint colors.

### Change background color

***

The section background is visible when the section has **top and bottom** **padding** or when the section width is **page width** or **full width padded**.

In the section settings, select a **color scheme** (at the top of the settings panel) to apply its background color. You can edit the color scheme in your theme settings.


# Video

<figure><img src="/files/KF4HitdHjVEF9padZNXN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Video**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up video

***

The **Video** section accepts videos uploaded to Shopify or linked videos from Youtube and Vimeo.

### Upload and embed video

`Click Video section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="221">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Shopify video</mark></td><td>Select or upload a video.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile Shopify video</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate video to show on mobile devices.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Youtube or Vimeo URL</mark></td><td>Enter the full URL of your YouTube or Vimeo video. The video must be public.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Video alt text</mark></td><td>Enter alt text to describe the content and purpose of the video for customers using screen readers.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change aspect ratio and focal point

***

You can crop the video to a uniform shape (**Aspect ratio**) and select the **Focal point** of your video to keep the most important part centred and avoid unwanted cropping.

{% hint style="warning" %}
These options only apply to **Shopify-hosted videos**.
{% endhint %}

`Click Video section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Crop the video to a uniform shape, or select Natural to maintain its original shape. "Aspect ratio" refers to the proportion between the video's width and height (W:H).</td><td><strong>Natural</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Portrait (2:3)</strong><br><strong>Portrait (4:5)</strong><br><strong>Square (1:1)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (5:4)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (3:2)</strong><br><strong>Landscape wide (16:9)</strong><br><strong>Landscape ultrawide (21:9)</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Video focal point</mark></td><td>Specify the main focus of the video. The focal point will remain centered and within frame to avoid unwanted cropping.</td><td><strong>Center</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Top</strong><br><strong>Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left</strong><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add cover image

***

After choosing your video, you can add a **Cover image** that overlays the video before visitors click play.

<table><thead><tr><th width="195">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Cover image</mark></td><td>Select or upload a preview image that overlays the video player. There are no required dimensions. A minimum width of 2500px will ensure optimal quality on the widest screens.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Play video on loop

After adding your video, you can choose to **Play the video on loop**.

`Click Video section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Play video on loop</mark></td><td>When checked, the video will start over after ending.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add content blocks

***

Click **(+) Add block** to add text and image content to the section. Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks, and add **Spacer** and **Divider** blocks to further customize the layout.

<div><figure><img src="/files/y6QvuNTjUyDpm7r7AO5y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/ilLCbPLKSa8N4nzH3WMB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Heading</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Overline text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Button</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Image</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Spacer</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Divider</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom Liquid</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change content layout

***

`Click Video section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="378">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content width</mark></td><td>Use the sliders to set the maximum width (in pixels) of the section content.</td><td><strong>200-1000 px</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 500</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text alignment</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for desktop screens.</td><td><strong>Left</strong><br><strong>Center</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text position</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for desktop screens.</td><td><strong>Above video</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Below video</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Video hero

{% hint style="info" %}
The Video hero section was added in v1.2.0 — [Update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) to access new features.
{% endhint %}

The **Video hero** section displays a full-width autoplaying video (without sound) with overlaid headings, text, and buttons.

<figure><img src="/files/E0BcE5yQeQzBGt0WYenf" alt="" width="563"><figcaption><p><a href="https://eclipse-theme-journey.myshopify.com/pages/race-run-clubs#video-hero">View demo</a></p></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Video hero**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="#section-colors">#section-colors</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up autoplay video

***

In the section settings, upload a .mp4 or .mov for a background video that autoplays (without sound).

You can upload an alternate **mobile video**, set a **focal point**, and customize the **overlay colors** to make your video look great on all devices.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Using color overlays</strong></mark></td><td>Learn how to change overlay colors and use gradients.</td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors</a></td><td><a href="/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ">/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Video requirements" %}
For **autoplay videos**, make sure your video files meet the following requirements:

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th width="210"></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Video file type</strong></td><td><code>.mp4</code> or <code>.mov</code><br><br><em>Embedded YouTube or Vimeo videos are not supported</em>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video length</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 20 seconds (Recommended)</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video size</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 10MB (Recommended)</td></tr></tbody></table>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

`Click Video hero section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Shopify video</mark></td><td>Select or upload a video that autoplays (without sound).</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile Shopify video</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate video to show on mobile devices.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Focal point</mark></td><td>For desktop and mobile, specify the main focus of the video. The focal point will remain centered and within frame to avoid unwanted cropping.</td><td><strong>Center</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Top</strong><br><strong>Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left</strong><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background link</mark></td><td>Select a page or URL to make the entire video a clickable link.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image animation</mark></td><td>Change the animation style of how the video loads. The image can gradually fade into view or be revealed by an iris swipe, which appears as a growing circle. Set to None to disable animations.</td><td><strong>None</strong><br><strong>Fade</strong><br><strong>Iris wipe</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change video height

***

You can adjust the height to make the video tall or compact. Choose to display the video with a **Fixed** or **Relative** height.

* **Fixed** heights maintain the same pixel height on all screens.
* **Relative** heights adapt the image height as a percentage of the screen height.

`Click Video hero section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop height</mark></td><td>Set the section height to a fixed height (in pixels) or relative height (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td><strong>Fixed height</strong><br>250 - 750px<br><strong>Relative height</strong><br>50 - 100%<br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 650px</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile height</mark></td><td>Change the maximum height of the video on mobile. Choose a fixed height (in pixels) or relative height (as a percentage of the screen height).</td><td><strong>Fixed height</strong><br>150 - 750px<br><strong>Relative height</strong><br>50 - 100%<br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 450px</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add content blocks

***

Click **(+) Add block** to add text and image content to the section. Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks, and add **Spacer** and **Divider** blocks to further customize the layout.

<div><figure><img src="/files/y6QvuNTjUyDpm7r7AO5y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/ilLCbPLKSa8N4nzH3WMB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Heading</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Overline text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Button</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Image</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Spacer</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Divider</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom Liquid</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change content layout

***

Adjust the alignment and width of the content blocks.

`Click Video hero section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="353">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content width</mark></td><td>Use the sliders to set the maximum width (in pixels) of the section content.</td><td><strong>200-1000 px</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 500</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text position</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for desktop screens.</td><td><strong>Top / Middle / Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left / Center / Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile text position</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for mobile screens.</td><td><strong>Top / Middle / Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left / Center / Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Section colors

***

The section uses two color schemes. The first color scheme applies a section **background** color, and the **overlay** color scheme applies text, button, and overlay tint colors.

### Change background color

***

The section background is visible when the section has **top and bottom** **padding** or when the section width is **page width** or **full width padded**.

In the section settings, select a **color scheme** (at the top of the settings panel) to apply its background color. You can edit the color scheme in your theme settings.


# Video with text

{% hint style="info" %}
The Video with text section was added in v1.2.0 — Learn how to [update your theme](/eclipse/changelog/update-your-theme) to access the latest features.
{% endhint %}

Use the **Video with text** section to combine an autoplay video (without sound) side-by-side with promotional text and button. With a flexible layout and optional content blocks, you can achieve a wide variety of looks.

* Add a featured **video** and **content blocks**.
* Customize the **layout** and change the **container color** for alternate looks.

> Check out the related [Image with text section](/eclipse/sections/image-with-text).

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing templates will change all pages that use the same template**. [Create new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) for different page layouts, or [show dynamic page content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) in the same template.
{% endhint %}

## Set up section

***

In the editor side panel, click **(+) Add section** and select **Video with text**. Click and hold the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order sections.

### Section styles

***

Click the section to edit general **section styles** for colors and spacing, available in all sections:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section colors</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section width</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Section padding</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up video

***

The **Video with text** section displays an autoplay video (without sound). After uploading your video, you can select the **focal point** of your video and add a **color overlay**.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Using color overlays</strong></mark></td><td>Learn how to change overlay colors and use gradients.</td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#overlay-colors</a></td><td><a href="/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ">/files/r6qvEikOKVMq5Hv30JkJ</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

{% tabs %}
{% tab title="Video requirements" %}
For **autoplay videos**, make sure your video files meet the following requirements:

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th width="210"></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Video file type</strong></td><td><code>.mp4</code> or <code>.mov</code><br><br><em>Embedded YouTube or Vimeo videos are not supported</em>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video length</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 20 seconds (Recommended)</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video size</strong></td><td>&#x3C; 10MB (Recommended)</td></tr></tbody></table>
{% endtab %}
{% endtabs %}

`Click Video with text section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Shopify video</mark></td><td>Select or upload a video that autoplays (without sound).</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile Shopify video</mark></td><td>Select or upload an alternate video to show on mobile devices.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Video focal point</mark></td><td>Specify the main focus of the video. The focal point will remain centered and within frame to avoid unwanted cropping.</td><td><strong>Center</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Top</strong><br><strong>Bottom</strong><br><strong>Left</strong><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background link</mark></td><td>Select a page or URL to make the entire video a clickable link.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change video layout

***

`Click Video with text section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop video width</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width of the video on desktop.</td><td><strong>35-70</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 50</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop video position</mark></td><td>Position the video to the left or right of the text content.</td><td><strong>Left of content</strong><br><strong>Right of content</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile video position</mark></td><td>On mobile, show the video before or after the text.</td><td><strong>Video first</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Video second</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Video breathing room</mark></td><td>Use the slider to add spacing around the video. Set the slider to 0 to display the video at the full width and height of the video area.</td><td><strong>0-60</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 0</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add content blocks

***

Click **(+) Add block** to add text and image content to the section. Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks, and add **Spacer** and **Divider** blocks to further customize the layout.

<div><figure><img src="/files/y6QvuNTjUyDpm7r7AO5y" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/ilLCbPLKSa8N4nzH3WMB" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Heading</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#heading-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#text-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Overline text</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#overline-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Button</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#button-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Image</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#image-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Spacer</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#spacer-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Divider</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#divider-block</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom Liquid</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block">/pages/1RQDWwxKzKWmtVBL177n#liquid-block</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change content layout

***

Change the width and alignment of all content blocks.

`Click section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content width</mark></td><td>Display the section at full width of the screen or set a custom width.<br><br>Under <em>Section</em>, you can also set the section width.</td><td><strong>Full width</strong><br><strong>Custom width</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom width</mark></td><td>Use the sliders to set the maximum width (in pixels) of the section content.</td><td><strong>200 - 1000 px</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content position</mark></td><td>For both desktop and mobile, choose the placement of the headings within the grid item. Select one of nine positions.<br><br>The horizontal and vertical placement applies when there's enough room in the content area.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text alignment</mark></td><td>Set the position of the text content for desktop screens.</td><td><strong>Left</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Center</strong><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change container color

***

Change the **Container color scheme** to show a background color for the content area.

You can add and define different color schemes in Theme settings > Colors. [Learn more](/eclipse/sections/overview/section-styles#section-colors)


# Custom Liquid

Section

{% hint style="warning" %}
**We do not support code customizations**. This guide offers a basic reference for developers and advanced users familiar with HTML and Liquid. Always test code changes on unpublished theme copies. For assistance, we recommend reaching out to a [verified Fluorescent partner](https://partners.fluorescent.co/).
{% endhint %}

With the **Custom Liquid** section, you can extend your theme by adding snippets of Liquid or HTML code as a section in the theme editor.

The Custom Liquid section provides a reliable and safer option compared to directly editing your theme code. It will help keep your theme copy eligible for updates and avoid conflicts with the original theme code.

## Add Custom Liquid

***

Click **(+) Add section** and select **Custom Liquid**. Use the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks. Click the section to start customizing.

{% hint style="info" %}
See Shopify's [Liquid reference guide](https://shopify.dev/docs/api/liquid) and [Liquid code examples](https://shopify.github.io/liquid-code-examples/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

## **Add anchor links to sections**

***

{% hint style="info" %}
Shopify dynamically generates ids for sections but these ids are not stable. The following instructions are a workaround for this platform limitation.
{% endhint %}

To link to a specific section on a page, you can use a **Custom Liquid** section with some HTML as a workaround. The HTML will include a special **`id`** property that will allow you to link directly to that section.

Once set up, the Custom Liquid section will not affect the page layout.

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Anchor link in the Header doesn't work?**

If your anchor link in the navigation menu points to a section on the same page, you will need to disable page transitions for the link to work. Go to **Theme settings > Animation** and deselect **Enable page transitions**.
{% endhint %}

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

In your theme editor (**Customize**):

1. Under **Template**, click **(+) Add section** and select **Custom Liquid**.
2. Click and hold the drag and drop handles **`⋮⋮`** to move the Custom Liquid section directly above the section you want to link to.
3. Click the **Custom Liquid** section to open the settings.
4. Enter the following HTML code and enter a unique **`id`** property in the opening tag. If using multiple words, you must use dashes (`-`) instead of spaces.

   > **`<span id="our-values"></span>`**

   > Recommended: Use an ID that's the same name as your section, and make sure the name is not used by other IDs.
5. Under **Section style**, set the **Padding** to **None**.
6. Find and click the section or block that will link *to* the Custom Liquid section.
7. In the link field, enter the **`id`** with a hashmark at the start (e.g. **`#our-values`**).

   > To **link from another page or menu link**, you must enter the full URL path with the anchor link at the end (e.g. **`www.store.com/#our-values`** or **`www.store.com/about#our-values`**).
8. Click **Save**.

</details>


# Announcement bar

The **Announcement bar** displays rotating announcements at the top of every page. Let customers know about current promotions, new products, or other need-to-know updates with links to more info.

* Add up to 3 announcements with links
* Display announcements as **rotating slideshow** or **scrolling text**
* Change announcement bar **colors**
* Enable **sticky bar** to keep announcments visible

<div align="right" data-full-width="false"><figure><img src="/files/0KviPEfwIyuq6h3JTHJE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Set up announcement bar

***

* Show announcements on **all pages** or **homepage only**
* Enable **sticky bar** to keep visible when scrolling
* Change the **text size** of announcements

`Click Announcement bar section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show on homepage only</mark></td><td>Choose to show announcement bar only on the home page or on all pages.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Enabled</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable sticky announcement bar</mark></td><td>When enabled, the bar remains visible at the top of the screen when scrolling down the page.</td><td><strong>Never</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Desktop</strong><br><strong>Mobile</strong><br><strong>Both</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text size</mark></td><td>Adjust the size of the section text from small to large.</td><td><strong>Small</strong><br><strong>Medium</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Large</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change color scheme

***

Select a set of colors to apply to the bar background and text. You can add and define different color schemes in Theme settings > Colors. [Learn more](/eclipse/sections/overview/section-styles#section-colors).

## Choose rotation style

***

The announcements have two rotation styles. The **Slideshow** style rotates announcements vertically. The **Scrolling text** style scrolls announcement text across the screen continuously.

`Click Announcement bar section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="170">Setting</th><th width="389">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Style</mark></td><td>Display announcements as rotating slides or as a scrolling ticker.</td><td><strong>Slideshow</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Scrolling text</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Customize slideshow style

***

`Click Announcement bar section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Auto-rotate announcements</mark></td><td>When unchecked, visitors can click to view the next announcements.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Change every</mark></td><td>Display each message between 4 to 15 seconds before rotating.</td><td><p><strong>4 - 15 sec</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 4</mark></p></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change scroll duration and direction

***

`Click Announcement bar section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Scroll duration</mark></td><td>Set the number of seconds it takes for announcements to scroll from beginning to end.</td><td><p><strong>5 - 45 sec</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 10</mark></p></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Scroll direction</mark></td><td>Choose to scroll content towards the left or right.</td><td><strong>Left</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add announcements

***

Add up to 3 announcements with rich text and alternate text for mobile screens.

Click the arrow next to the **Header** section, then click **(+) Add Announcement**. Click an announcement block to add text.

`Click Announcement block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Enter a text as a storewide message. We recommend between 4 and 8 words.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "Free worldwide shipping..."</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text on mobile</mark></td><td>Enter alternate text to display on mobile.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Header

Section

The **Header** appears at the top of every page with a menu with icons for search and the cart.

<figure><img src="/files/YMEacxIk256WfGcDFtNz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Set up header menu

***

By default, the header menu uses the **Main menu** from your Shopify Admin.

To edit this menu, go to **Content > Menus** in your admin. You can also create a new menu and select that as your header menu in the theme editor.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Mega menu</strong></mark></td><td>Display links in a multi-column dropdown menu.</td><td><a href="/pages/NDNmiM6RXB5UBg2SGGk1">/pages/NDNmiM6RXB5UBg2SGGk1</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change layout and style

***

Click the **Header** section to customize its appearance.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Color scheme</strong></mark></td><td>Choose a color scheme.</td><td><a href="/pages/ZSIHHQbe5NAWDHiNfmNN#choose-color-scheme">/pages/ZSIHHQbe5NAWDHiNfmNN#choose-color-scheme</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Layout</strong></mark></td><td>Rearrange the elements of the header.</td><td><a href="/pages/ZSIHHQbe5NAWDHiNfmNN#choose-header-layout">/pages/ZSIHHQbe5NAWDHiNfmNN#choose-header-layout</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Logo</strong></mark></td><td>Replace the store name with an image.</td><td><a href="/pages/ZpiYVrlNu4BjAF8WmMzZ">/pages/ZpiYVrlNu4BjAF8WmMzZ</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Transparent header</strong></mark></td><td>Make the header background transparent.</td><td><a href="/pages/vzbzhwLnvVvUlOa9XOPB">/pages/vzbzhwLnvVvUlOa9XOPB</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Sticky header</strong></mark></td><td>Fix the header to the top of the screen.</td><td><a href="/pages/ZSIHHQbe5NAWDHiNfmNN#enable-sticky-header">/pages/ZSIHHQbe5NAWDHiNfmNN#enable-sticky-header</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Cart icon</strong></mark></td><td>Change the icon for the cart.</td><td><a href="/pages/ZSIHHQbe5NAWDHiNfmNN#change-cart-icon">/pages/ZSIHHQbe5NAWDHiNfmNN#change-cart-icon</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Show language and country selectors

***

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Language selector</strong></mark></td><td>Allow visitors to view your store in another language that you've added.</td><td><a href="/pages/QPwVUlA64AeE3jnzBChY#show-language-selector">/pages/QPwVUlA64AeE3jnzBChY#show-language-selector</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Country selector</strong></mark></td><td>Allow visitors to select their preferred region and currency.</td><td><a href="/pages/QPwVUlA64AeE3jnzBChY#show-country-selector">/pages/QPwVUlA64AeE3jnzBChY#show-country-selector</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Layout and style

Header

Customize the look of the **Header** in the section settings.

* Choose color scheme for header
* Change the **Layout** of the logo and menu
* Enable the **Sticky header** to fix it to the top of the page
* Change the **Cart icon** to a bag or cart

## Choose color scheme

***

Use the **Color scheme** picker to change the color scheme. You can edit and add color schemes in your theme settings.

## Choose header layout

***

Change the layout of the logo, search bar, and menu for both desktop and mobile.

`Click Header section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="154">Setting</th><th width="310">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Header layout</mark></td><td>Change the position of the logo and menu in the header.</td><td><strong>Logo left menu left</strong><br><strong>Logo left menu center</strong><br><strong>Logo center menu left</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Logo center drawer menu</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Width</mark></td><td>Set the content width of the header contents. This setting applies to the mega menu as well</td><td><strong>Page width</strong><br><strong>Full width</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Enable sticky header

***

The **Sticky header** option fixes the Header to the top of the screen or window when customers scroll down the page.

{% hint style="info" %}
The Delayed transition style will vary depending on the Announcement bar and Impact logo:

* If there’s a sticky announcement bar, then sticky header appears immediately.
* If Impact logo is present, sticky header appears after scrolling past the impact logo.
* If there’s no sticky announcement bar or impact logo, sticky header appears when header is out of view.
  {% endhint %}

`Click Header section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="215">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable sticky header</mark></td><td>Choose to fix the Header to the top of the screen or window so it remains visible when visitors scroll down the page.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Sticky transition style</mark></td><td>Choose to stick the header instantly or delay showing the sticky header until scrolling down.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change cart icon

***

Choose to display the cart icon as either a **Cart** or **Bag**.

`Click Header section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Cart icon</mark></td><td>Change the icon style for the cart in the header.<br><br><strong>No icon</strong> shows a simple button with the item count.</td><td><strong>Cart</strong><br><strong>Bag</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>No icon</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Logo

Header

Replace the store title with a custom logo image. We recommend a logo image with a transparent background and a minimum width of 50px in PNG or SVG format.

{% hint style="info" %}
Check out the [Impact logo](/eclipse/header/impact-logo) to display a large full-width logo below the header on the home page.
{% endhint %}

`Click Header section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Upload a PNG or SVG image to display as your store logo in the header. The name of your store displays when no logo image is uploaded.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Brand logo</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image width</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width of your logo image on desktop screens.</td><td><strong>20 - 350 px</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 120</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image width</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width of your logo image on mobile screens.</td><td><strong>20 - 250 px</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 90</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Transparent header

Make the header background transparent to display the full height of featured media sections. You can enable the transparent header on the home page and other selected pages.

If the **sticky header** option is enabled, the header will transition to the default colors and logo when the page is scrolled down.

## Supported sections

***

The transparent header requires a full-width section at the top of the page. Supported sections include:

* [Image hero](/eclipse/sections/image-hero)
* [Slideshow](/eclipse/sections/slideshow)
* [Video hero](/eclipse/sections/video-hero)
* [Collection banner](/eclipse/collections/collection-page/banner)

{% hint style="info" %}
**Important**

Set **Section width** to `Full width` and **Top padding** to `0px`. Click the section and scroll to the bottom the find the settings.

<img src="/files/ML2K951gbJcF4uze5N66" alt="" data-size="original">
{% endhint %}

## Enable on home page

***

Click the **Header** section and scroll down the the **Transparent header** settings. Check the **Enable on home page** checkbox to turn on the transparent header.

## Enable on other pages

***

To enable the transparent header on other pages, enter the template names separated by commas in the **Enable on additional templates** field.

Enter the full template name with the template type and name, with a period in between (ex. **`page.about`**).

![](/files/1ZX3ywKVUKHeGD6vRkNE)

The following are default templates in Eclipse:

````
```
404
cart
collection
list-collections
page.contact
password
product
search

```
````

## Add alternate logo

***

You may want to use a different colored logo if the section image is darker or lighter than the default header color. For example, if your default logo is black, upload a white transparent header logo to contrast with darker images or videos.

{% hint style="warning" %}
Your alternate **logo image must have the same width and height as the default logo**
{% endhint %}

If the **sticky header** option is enabled, the header will change to the default logo and colors when the page is scrolled.

`Click Header section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="166">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Logo image</mark></td><td>Upload a PNG image to display as your store logo when the header is transparent.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>If no logo is uploaded, change the text color of the store title.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Mega menu

Header

**Mega menus** display menu links in multiple columns so customers can quickly browse large catalogs. Add multiple sub-menus along with a featured image, text, and links to customize your mega menu.

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;">Why is the mega menu not working in other languages?</mark></summary>

If you've translated your store using an app, make sure the "Parent dropdown link" name is not translated, as this will break the mega nav. See instructions below for [fixing translated mega navigations](#translating-mega-navigations).

</details>

<figure><img src="/files/BBAg1qCWQ3fjTaNt0mEk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Create nested menu in admin

***

Before adding the mega menu block, you will need to create a menu with three levels of nested links.

* The **top-level** link appears in the header and opens the mega menu.
* The **2nd-level** links appear as column headings inside the mega menu.
* The **3rd-level** links appear in columns below the second-level links.

From your Shopify admin, go to **Content > Menus**. Choose a menu item to be the 'parent' or top-level link that will open the mega menu from the header. To create 2nd-level and 3rd-level links, use the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`** to move links under other links to nest them.

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

In your **Shopify admin**:

1. Go to **Content > Menus**.
2. Select the main menu used for your header.
3. Add a top-level link that will open the mega menu and contain the nested sub-menus.
4. Add your 2nd-level menu links and use the drag handles ⋮⋮ to move them under the top-level link.
5. Add your 3rd-level menu links and use the drag handles ⋮⋮ to move them under the 2nd-level links.
6. Click **Save.**

</details>

<div><figure><img src="/files/V0wL7qbvYRnA9KoJ9yD9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/lLNq1JJ59nsMVpUaktiq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Add mega menu block

***

Once you have created your nested menu, you can now add **mega menu blocks** to your **Header** in the theme editor.

> 1. Click the arrow next to the **Header** section, and click **(+) Add Mega menu**.
> 2. Click the **Mega menu block** to open the settings.
> 3. Enter the exact name of the top-level link (e.g. "Shop") in the **Dropdown parent link** field.
> 4. Click **Save**.

## Customize menu layout

***

Change the number of columns and choose to display 2nd-level links without nested links in a single column.

`Click Mega menu block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Column count</mark></td><td>Set the number of columns. If there are more submenus than columns, then submenus will appear in multiple rows.</td><td><strong>1-4</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 4</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Condense solo categories</mark></td><td>Conserve space by stacking consecutive 2nd-level links without nested links.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change text styles

***

Change the font used for the headings (2nd-level links) and submenu (3rd-level links).

`Click Mega menu block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading text style</mark></td><td>Choose the font for the heading as set in the theme settings.</td><td><strong>Heading</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Body</strong><br><strong>Overline</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Submenu text style</mark></td><td>Choose the font for the submenu text as set in the theme settings.</td><td><strong>Heading</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Body</strong><br><strong>Overline</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add promotions

***

Add up to four **promotion blocks** in the mega menu.

### Create menu with only promotions

***

You can create a mega menu with only promotions like the one below.

> 1. In **Content > Menus**, click to open the menu used for the header.
> 2. Add a top-level link to your header menu without any nested links.
> 3. In the **Mega menu block** settings, add the top-level link name to **Dropdown parent link**.
> 4. Enable and set up between 2 to 4 promos and add **Links** for each.

<figure><img src="/files/tl9wtLHOIMGWAOBPdGe3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Mega menu block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="162">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable</mark></td><td>Show promo feature in the mega menu.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td>Select or upload an image for the promo block.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of the promo.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add multiple lines of text to describe the promo.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Link</mark></td><td>Select or paste a link to redirect visitors when they click the image.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Customize promotion styles

***

Change the promotions' **layout**, **position**, and **image shape**.

`Click Mega menu block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Select an <strong>aspect ratio</strong> to crop images to be a uniform shape, or select <strong>Natural</strong> to display images in their original shape.</td><td><strong>Natural</strong><br><strong>Portrait (2:3)</strong><br><strong>Portrait (4:5)</strong><br><strong>Square (1:1)</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Landscape (5:4)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (3:2)</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Position on desktop</mark></td><td>For desktop screens, place promotions before or after the menu links.</td><td><strong>First</strong><br><strong>Last</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Position on mobile</mark></td><td>For mobile screens, place promotions before or after the menu links.</td><td><strong>First</strong><br><strong>Last</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show promos on mobile</mark></td><td>Display promos on mobile devices.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Layout on mobile</mark></td><td>Display promo features as a list or in a single rotating row.</td><td><strong>Slider</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>List</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Translating mega menus

***

When translating your theme, make sure the "Dropdown parent link" text from the mega menu settings is **not** translated.

If you've auto-translated your theme, the parent link text may have been translated, which will break the mega menu for other languages.

If you're using the [Translate & Adapt app](https://apps.shopify.com/translate-and-adapt):

> 1. In the Shopify admin, click **Translate & Adapt** to open the app.
> 2. Go to **Theme > Section groups**.
> 3. Click **Header Group** in the side panel.
> 4. Scroll down to find the "Meganav Parent link" that's used for the dropdown parent link.
> 5. Delete any translations of the parent link in the secondary language column.
> 6. Click **Save**.

<figure><img src="/files/aPUb8e6FAUiMFpkuejp2" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Language and Currency

Header

<figure><img src="/files/sawOAl5IHCPF7EeVUtzP" alt="" width="510"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Show language selector

***

Eclipse supports selling in multiple languages. After you have [added and published languages](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/markets/languages/translate) to your store, enable the **Language selector** to let customers select their preferred language.

`Click Header section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="223">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show language selector</mark></td><td>Allow visitors to browse your store in another language that you've enabled in your settings.<br><br>You can add multiple languages in your Shopify admin and use a translation app to translate your store content in multiple languages.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show country selector

***

Enable the **Country selector** to let customers to view your products with their preferred currency. The selector displays countries with their currencies supported in your [Shopify Market settings](https://www.shopify.com/admin/settings/markets).

{% hint style="success" %}
See Shopify's [Sell in multiple currencies with Shopify Payments](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/payments/shopify-payments/multi-currency) guide to learn how to add multiple currencies.
{% endhint %}

`Click Header section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="202">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show country selector</mark></td><td>Allow visitors to view prices in their preferred currency.<br><br>The selector shows country currencies that are supported in your <a href="https://www.shopify.com/admin/settings/markets">Shopify Market settings</a>.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show country flag</mark></td><td>Display a flag icon next to country names in the selector.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Label</mark></td><td>Display selector options as currencies only or as the currency and country.</td><td><strong>Currency only</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Country and Currency</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Impact logo

Header

The **Impact logo** displays a prominent logo image below the header on the home page. The impact logo hides when the page is scrolled down.

<details>

<summary>Why is there extra space around the logo?</summary>

You can reduce the amount of padding

Make sure to crop your image to avoid unwanted space around the logo. You can use [Shopify's built-in image editor <mark style="color:blue;">↗</mark>](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/shopify-admin/productivity-tools/media-editor#crop-an-image) to crop, resize, and even remove image backgrounds.

![](/files/TlNfDXifR4JNa1KorBg0)<br>

You can also

</details>

<figure><img src="/files/VChA2KNc6t2N8dkU6J6f" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Hide impact logo

***

To remove the impact logo from your home page, click the **Hide** (eye) icon on the section.

<figure><img src="/files/FQyPcmlmVTw5tFXPFm58" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Set up impact logo

***

Open the **Impact logo** section and upload your image with the following recommendations:

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th width="198"></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>File format</strong></td><td>Use <em><strong>.png</strong></em>, <em><strong>.svg</strong></em>, or <strong>.</strong><em><strong>webp</strong></em> image with a transparent background<strong>.</strong></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Image width</strong></td><td>Use images with a minimum width between <strong>250px</strong> and <strong>1200px.</strong><br><br>For <strong>full width impact logo</strong>, we recommend logo images that are wider than they are tall.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Logo color</strong></td><td>For the <strong>Transparent impact logo</strong>, you may want to change the logo color to contrast with the underlying section image.</td></tr></tbody></table>

{% hint style="info" %}
Make sure to crop your image to avoid unwanted space around the logo. You can use [Shopify's built-in image editor <mark style="color:blue;">↗</mark>](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/shopify-admin/productivity-tools/media-editor#crop-an-image) to crop, resize, and even remove image backgrounds.

![](/files/TlNfDXifR4JNa1KorBg0)<br>
{% endhint %}

### Choose visibility for screen sizes

***

The impact logo can appear on **all screen sizes** or **on large screens** (desktop and tablet) only.

{% hint style="info" %}
If your image is taller than wide, you may want to show the logo **on large screens** only to keep the top section visible on mobile screens.
{% endhint %}

`Click Impact logo section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="318">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Visibility</mark></td><td>Choose to display on all screen sizes or only large screens.</td><td><strong>On all screen sizes</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>On large screens</strong><br></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Set image width

***

By default, the impact logo spans the **full width** of the screen. For smaller logos, you can set a **Custom width** between 250px to 1200px.

{% hint style="info" %}
We recommend setting the **image width** option to match the actual pixel width of the image.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/puQB2HBsWoWy5BpEhAjr" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Impact logo section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="318">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image width</mark></td><td>Set the logo width to the page width, full width, or a custom width.</td><td><strong>Page width</strong><br><strong>Full width</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Custom width</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom width</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width of the impact logo.</td><td><strong>250px - 1200px</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 500px</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change alignment and padding

***

For logo images that are below full width, you can choose to **align** the impact logo to the left, center, or right of the screen. You can also adjust the **padding** above and below the impact logo.

<figure><img src="/files/n9LCCNSNWL4kbN71aSrU" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Impact logo section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Alignment</mark></td><td>If logo image is less than full width, position the logo either to the left, center, or right.</td><td><strong>Left</strong><br><strong>Center</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Top padding</mark></td><td>For desktop and mobile, add spacing above the impact logo.</td><td><strong>0 - 80px</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 40px</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Bottom padding</mark></td><td>For desktop and mobile, add spacing below the impact logo.</td><td><strong>0 - 80px</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 40px</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Disable transparent impact logo

***

By default, the **transparent impact logo** overlays the section at the top of the page.

The transparent logo requires a full-width [Slideshow](/eclipse/sections/slideshow) at the top of the page.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Important**

Set **Section width** to `Full width` and **Top padding** to `0px`. Click the section and scroll to the bottom the find the settings.

<img src="/files/ML2K951gbJcF4uze5N66" alt="" data-size="original">
{% endhint %}

`Click Impact logo section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable transparent impact logo</mark></td><td>When enabled, the impact logo overlays the top section to display the full height of full width media sections.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: Enabled</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Change animation style

***

By default, the impact logo is animated with a **parallax effect** and **fade effect** when scrolling down the page. You can disable the parallax effect and change the direction of the fade effect.

`Click Impact logo section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable parallax on scroll</mark></td><td>When enabled, the impact logo moves at a different speed than the page when scrolling. This parallax effect creates an appearance of depth and perspective.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: Enabled</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Fade effect on scroll</mark></td><td>Choose how the impact logo fades when scrolling down the page.</td><td><strong>Full fade</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Bottom to top fade</strong><br><strong>Top to bottom fade</strong><br><strong>Disabled</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Search

Header

The **Search drawer** in the header lets visitors search your collections, products, and pages.

<figure><img src="/files/onf2ofJHs2hSjDsK2fo2" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="success" %}
You can customize search results with Shopify's [Search & Discovery app](https://apps.shopify.com/search-and-discovery). Create custom filters, select result types, and add "synonym groups" to show relevant results. See Shopify's [App guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/search-and-discovery) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

## Predictive search

***

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable predictive search</mark></td><td>Enable instant search results and auto-complete suggestions in the search drawer.<br><br>When disabled, customers are redirected to the search results page.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox" checked><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Results per category</mark></td><td>Set the maximum number of results for each content type (pages, products, collections) in the search bar.</td><td><strong>4 - 10</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 4</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show prices</mark></td><td>Show prices for products that appear in search results.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show vendors</mark></td><td>Show vendors for products that appear in search results.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Searchable fields

***

Choose which parts of your store should be searchable to limit search results.

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Author</mark></td><td>Make the author field searchable.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Body</mark></td><td>Make body text for products, pages, and collections searchable.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Product type</mark></td><td>Make product types searchable.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Tag</mark></td><td>Make product tags searchable.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Title</mark></td><td>Make product, page, and collection titles searchable.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Variant barcode</mark></td><td>Make variant barcodes searchable.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Variant SKU</mark></td><td>Make variant SKUs searchable.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Variant title</mark></td><td>Make variant titles searchable.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Vendor</mark></td><td>Make vendors searchable.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show quick links

***

When a search hasn't been made yet, you can display suggested links to help customers get started.

#### Create menu

From your Shopify admin, go to **Content > Menus**. Click **Create menu** and **Add menu items**. Click **Save**.

#### Connect menu

In your theme editor, go to **Theme settings > Predictive search**. Under **Quick links**, select the menu you created in the Shopify admin.

<figure><img src="/files/nAoKe2PAhMiwXPchSO9o" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>Enter a title for the list of quick links.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "Quick links"</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Links</mark></td><td>Select a menu of links (created in your Shopify admin) to display as quick links.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Footer

The **Footer** appears at the bottom of every page. It's a great place for quick-access links, contact details, and other store information.

* Design the footer layout with **feature blocks**
* Show **social media** and **payment icons**
* Show l**anguage and country selectors**

<figure><img src="/files/ZyCWVlNFElrkfsiTIhjZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Set up section

***

Click the section to edit the **general section colors and spacing**. Learn more:

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Color scheme</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td><a href="/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6">/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section width</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td><a href="/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt">/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section padding</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td><a href="/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov">/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add footer content blocks

***

Use **footer blocks** to add menu links, text, images, an email signup, and social media icons.

* Click **(+) Add block** to add feature blocks to the footer.
* Use the drag handles **`⋮⋮`** to change the order of the footer blocks.
* Click a block to customize the content and settings.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Links</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/R8zVGrspebrhwKErtVyR">/pages/R8zVGrspebrhwKErtVyR</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Newsletter and socials</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/jS87oGXG6603Jcmp44ug">/pages/jS87oGXG6603Jcmp44ug</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Image text and socials</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/87OckFXNujNUz6LA4s6p">/pages/87OckFXNujNUz6LA4s6p</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom Liquid</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/F52gi2H6BLAjejvaYcBC">/pages/F52gi2H6BLAjejvaYcBC</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Spacer block

***

Add a spacer block and position it between other footer blocks to add extra space.

`Click Spacer block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop width</mark></td><td>Use the sliders to increase the amount of horizontal space on desktop.</td><td><strong>10-100 px</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 20</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile height</mark></td><td>Use the sliders to increase the horizontal spacing on desktop.</td><td><strong>0-100 px</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 0</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change layout

***

Customize the general layout and style of the footer. In the footer section settings:

* Change **alignment** of footer content
* Increase the **gap** between columns
* Change the **column heading font**

`Click Footer section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Footer alignment</mark></td><td>Align the content of the footer to the left or center.<br><br>When <strong>Center</strong> is selected, the subfooter content will also be centered (the selectors, copyright text, payment icons, and subfooter links).</td><td><strong>Left</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Center</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Column gap</mark></td><td>Use slider to add space between the footer blocks. Set to `0px` to remove space.</td><td><strong>0-60 px</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 40</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Column heading text style</mark></td><td>Change the style of the heading text used by footer blocks. Text styles are based on your theme settings.</td><td><strong>Heading</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Body</strong><br><strong>Overline</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Show language and country selectors

***

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Language selector</strong></mark></td><td>Allow visitors to view your store in another language that you've added.</td><td><a href="/pages/I8ToYH6CIE6VhHzxtJTK#show-language-selector">/pages/I8ToYH6CIE6VhHzxtJTK#show-language-selector</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Country selector</strong></mark></td><td>Allow visitors to select their preferred region and currency.</td><td><a href="/pages/I8ToYH6CIE6VhHzxtJTK#show-country-selector">/pages/I8ToYH6CIE6VhHzxtJTK#show-country-selector</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Show payment icons

***

Enable **Payment icons** to display a row of supported payment methods.

{% hint style="info" %}
The icons that are displayed depend on the payment methods that are available in your customer's region and currency. See [Shopify's Payments guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/payments)
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/sClIeucgfcZxOjLsyC0u" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Footer section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="201">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show payment icons</mark></td><td>Show icons of your store's payment methods, as enabled in your Shopify admin.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Add additional copyright text

***

Add an additional line of text below the copyright text. Click the **Footer** section, and enter text in the **Additional copyright text** field.

<table><thead><tr><th width="236">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Additional copyright text</mark></td><td>Add custom text to the end of the "Copyright" line.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Subfooter links</mark></td><td>Show additional links at the bottom of the footer. Select a menu that you've created in your Shopify admin.</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Remove "Powered by Shopify"

***

The "Powered by Shopify" text appears in the footer on every page. You can edit or remove this text in the default theme content editor.

* In your theme editor, click the **Actions (**<kbd>**...**</kbd>**)** button and select **Edit default theme content**.
* Search "Powered by Shopify" to find the default text in the **Checkout & system > Links** area.
* To remove default text, replace the text in the field with a single space.


# Image Text and Socials

Footer

In the footer, show a block with an image, text and social icons. It's a good place to show your logo with some text about your store.

<figure><img src="/files/H69xtbS9kYXk0kTMwQhZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Add image text and socials block

***

Click the arrow next to the **Footer** section, then click **(+) Add block** and select **Image, text, and socials**. Use the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks. Click the block to start adding content.

### Change desktop width

***

Change the block width to adjust the layout with other footer blocks.

`Click Image Text and Socials block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="201">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop width</mark></td><td><p>Use the slider to increase the width of the footer block on desktop.</p><p>To keep all columns in a single row, make sure all footer block widths add up to 100%. To display block on its own row, set the desktop width to 100%.</p></td><td><strong>10 - 100%</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 20%</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile width</mark></td><td>Set the width of the footer block on mobile. Set the width to `100%` to avoid line breaks in link names.</td><td><strong>50%</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>100%</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Set up image

***

Upload an image and adjust its **width** and **position**.

`Click Image, text, and socials block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="162">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image</mark></td><td><p>Select or upload an image. There are no required dimensions. We recommend an image with a minimum width of 50px.</p><p>Use PNG files for images with a transparent background.</p></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop image width</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width (in pixels) of the image on desktop.</td><td><p><strong>50 - 500px</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 100px</mark></p></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile image width</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width (in pixels) of the image on mobile.</td><td><p><strong>50 - 500px</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 100px</mark></p></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Image position</mark></td><td>Show the image above or below the text.</td><td><strong>Above text</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Below text</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change heading and text

***

Change the heading and subheading text. Leave fields blank to hide them. You can change the **size** and **font** of the text.

`Click Image, text, and socials block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of the block. Leave the field blank to remove the heading. However, a heading is required when collapsible rows on mobile are enabled.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "About us"</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show heading on desktop</mark></td><td>Choose whether to show the block heading on desktop screens.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: Enabled</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add multiple lines of rich text.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "Share contact information..."</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Display collapsible row on mobile

***

On mobile screens, you can display the block in a collapsible row, instead of as a column.

> **Note**: A **heading** is required for the collapsible row.

`Click Image, text, and socials block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Collapsible row on mobile</mark></td><td>Display the block as an expandable row that reveals the block content when clicked.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Disabled</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Show social icons

***

Display social icons that link to your profile pages. Open the **Theme settings** tab in the settings panel to enter the full URL of your profile pages.

`Click Image, text, and socials block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="198">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show social icons</mark></td><td>Show icons for your social media accounts.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default:</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;"> Enabled</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of social media area. Leave the field blank to remove the heading.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: Follow us</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Enable Follow on Shop

***

Follow on Shop allows customers to follow your store on the Shop app and receive personalized recommendations and notifications about your products.

{% hint style="warning" %}
To use this feature, you need to have the Shop channel installed, and Shop Pay activated on your store. See [Shopify's Follow on Shop guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/follow-on-shop) for assistance.
{% endhint %}

`Click Image, text, and socials block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="198">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable Follow on Shop</mark></td><td>Allow visitors to follow you on Shop to receive recommendations and notifications about your products.<br><br>You'll need to have the Shop channel installed and Shop Pay activated on your store. See <a href="https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/follow-on-shop">Shopify's Follow on Shop guide</a></td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: Enabled</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Links block

Footer

In the footer, show menu links from one of your [Shopify navigation menus](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/menus-and-links).

<figure><img src="/files/Tx5nIp8dbPOhFAQhletB" alt=""><figcaption><p>Three links blocks in the footer</p></figcaption></figure>

## Add links block

***

Click the arrow next to the **Footer** section, then click **(+) Add block** and select **Links**. Use the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks. Click the block to start adding content.

Click the **Links** block to **select a menu** that you've created in the Shopify admin.

`Click Links block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="149">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Menu</mark></td><td><p>Select a menu of links that you've created in your Shopify admin.</p><p>Only top-level links are displayed, so dropdown menus will not appear.</p></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change block width

***

Change the block width to adjust the layout with other footer blocks.

`Click Links block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="178">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop width</mark></td><td><p>Use the slider to increase the width of the footer block on desktop.</p><p>To keep all columns in a single row, make sure all footer block widths add up to 100%. To display block on its own row, set the desktop width to 100%.</p></td><td><strong>10 - 100%</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 20%</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile width</mark></td><td>Set the width of the footer block on mobile. Set the width to `100%` to avoid line breaks in link names.</td><td><strong>50%</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>100%</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Select menu links

***

Click a **Links block** to select a menu that you've created in the Shopify admin.

`Click Links block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Menu</mark></td><td><p>Select a menu of links that you've created in your Shopify admin.</p><p>Only top-level links are displayed, so dropdown menus will not appear.</p></td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Footer menu</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change heading

***

Change the heading text above the links and choose whether to show the heading on desktop.

`Click Links block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of the links block. Leave the field blank to remove the heading. However, a heading is required when collapsible rows on mobile are enabled.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Links</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show heading on desktop</mark></td><td>Choose whether to show the block heading on desktop screens.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Enabled</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Display collapsible row on mobile

***

On mobile screens, you can display the links block in a collapsible row, instead of as a column.

> **Note**: A **heading** is required for the collapsible row.

`Click Links block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Collapsible row on mobile</mark></td><td>Display the block as an expandable row that reveals the block content when clicked.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Disabled</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Newsletter and Socials

Footer

In the footer, show an email signup form with social icons.

{% hint style="info" %}
Newsletter subscribers are added to your "accepts marketing" [Customers](https://shopify.com/admin/customers?query=\&accepts_marketing=1) list. See Shopify's [Marketing guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/promoting-marketing/create-marketing/customer-contact-information) and learn about [Subscriber lists](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/promoting-marketing/create-marketing/shopify-email/email-subscriber-list-management) and using [Shopify Email](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/promoting-marketing/create-marketing/shopify-email)
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/fWO919qMOyTS2WyJEki6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Add newsletter and socials block

***

Click the arrow next to the **Footer** section, then click **(+) Add block** and select **Newsletter and socials**. Use the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks. Click the block to start adding content.

### Change desktop width

***

Change the block width to adjust the layout with other footer blocks.

`Click Newsletter and Socials block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="157">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop width</mark></td><td><p>Use the slider to increase the width of the footer block on desktop.</p><p>To keep all columns in a single row, make sure all footer block widths add up to 100%. To display block on its own row, set the desktop width to 100%.</p></td><td><strong>10 - 100%</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 20%</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Mobile width</mark></td><td>Set the width of the footer block on mobile. Set the width to `100%` to avoid line breaks in link names.</td><td><strong>50%</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>100%</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Change text headings

***

Change the heading and subheading text. Leave fields blank to hide them. You can change the **size** and **font** of the text.

`Click Newsletter and Socials block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="198">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of the newsletter block. Leave the field blank to remove the heading. However, a heading is required when collapsible rows on mobile are enabled.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Newsletter</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Add multiple lines of rich text to tell visitors about your subscriber list.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: "Sign up for exclusive offers..."</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text size</mark></td><td>Adjust the size of the text from small to large.</td><td><strong>1 - 8</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 7</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text style</mark></td><td>Change the style of the text. Text styles are based on your theme settings.</td><td><strong>Heading</strong><br><strong>Body</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Show social icons

***

Display social icons that link to your profile pages. Open the **Theme settings** tab in the settings panel to enter the full URL of your profile pages.

<figure><img src="/files/ucZ64looYv5ll5YIxJcX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

`Click Newsletter and Socials block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="198">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show social icons</mark></td><td>Show icons for your social media accounts.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default:</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;"> Enabled</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of social media area. Leave the field blank to remove the heading.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: Follow us</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Enable Follow on Shop

***

Follow on Shop allows customers to follow your store on the Shop app and receive personalized recommendations and notifications about your products.

{% hint style="warning" %}
To use this feature, you need to have the Shop channel installed, and Shop Pay activated on your store. See [Shopify's Follow on Shop guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/follow-on-shop) for assistance.
{% endhint %}

`Click Newsletter and Socials block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="198">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable Follow on Shop</mark></td><td>Allow visitors to follow you on Shop to receive recommendations and notifications about your products.<br><br>You'll need to have the Shop channel installed and Shop Pay activated on your store. See <a href="https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/themes/customizing-themes/follow-on-shop">Shopify's Follow on Shop guide</a></td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: Enabled</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Language and Currency

Footer

### Show language selector

***

Eclipse supports selling in multiple languages. After you have [added and published languages](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/markets/languages/translate) to your store, enable the **Language selector** to let customers select their preferred language.

`Click Footer section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="223">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show language selector</mark></td><td>Allow visitors to browse your store in another language that you've enabled in your settings.<br><br>You can add multiple languages in your Shopify admin and use a translation app to translate your store content in multiple languages.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show country selector

***

Enable the **Country selector** to let customers to view your products with their preferred currency. The selector displays countries with their currencies supported in your [Shopify Market settings](https://www.shopify.com/admin/settings/markets).

{% hint style="success" %}
See Shopify's [Sell in multiple currencies with Shopify Payments](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/payments/shopify-payments/multi-currency) guide to learn how to add multiple currencies.
{% endhint %}

`Click Footer section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="202">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show country selector</mark></td><td>Allow visitors to view prices in their preferred currency.<br><br>The selector shows country currencies that are supported in your <a href="https://www.shopify.com/admin/settings/markets">Shopify Market settings</a>.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show country flag</mark></td><td>Display a flag icon next to country names in the selector.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Label</mark></td><td>Display selector options as currencies only or as the currency and country.</td><td><strong>Currency only</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Country and Currency</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Custom Liquid

Footer

{% hint style="warning" %}
**We do not support code customizations**. This guide offers a basic reference for developers and advanced users familiar with HTML and Liquid. Always test code changes on unpublished theme copies. For assistance, we recommend reaching out to a [verified Fluorescent partner](https://partners.fluorescent.co/).
{% endhint %}

With the **Custom Liquid** block, you can extend your theme by adding snippets of Liquid or HTML code as a block or section in the theme editor.

The Custom Liquid block provides a reliable and safer option compared to directly editing your theme code. It will help keep your theme copy eligible for updates and avoid conflicts with the original theme code.

## Add Custom Liquid block

***

Under **Footer**, click **(+) Add block** and select **Custom Liquid**. Use the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks. Click the block to start customizing.

`Click Custom Liquid block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop width</mark></td><td>Use the slider to increase the width of the footer block on desktop. For best results, make sure all footer block widths add up to 100%.</td><td><strong>10 - 100</strong>% <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 20%</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom Liquid</mark></td><td>Add custom Liquid code for apps or custom content.<br><br>See Shopify's <a href="https://shopify.dev/docs/api/liquid">Liquid reference guide</a> to learn more.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Product listings

**Product listings** are products displayed on collection pages and in theme sections. Each product displays the product's image, title, and price, along with optional quick shopping features.

In your theme editor, go to **Theme settings > Product listings** to customize the style and features of product cards.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Product card details</strong></mark></td><td>Show vendor, swatches, and rating stars.</td><td><a href="/pages/x01s1vsbkaTmrz5vMCTM#product-card-details">/pages/x01s1vsbkaTmrz5vMCTM#product-card-details</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Product image styles</strong></mark></td><td>Change image shape and show secondary image on hover.</td><td><a href="/pages/x01s1vsbkaTmrz5vMCTM#product-card-images">/pages/x01s1vsbkaTmrz5vMCTM#product-card-images</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Product badges</strong></mark></td><td>Show sale, sold-out, and custom badges.</td><td><a href="/pages/lHkYr8Pi1m4nEvlL00o4">/pages/lHkYr8Pi1m4nEvlL00o4</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Quick shopping</strong></mark></td><td>Show Quick view or Quick add button.</td><td><a href="/pages/8QM9MhSVD7IyUm1qmdWk">/pages/8QM9MhSVD7IyUm1qmdWk</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Product card styles

Go to **Theme settings > Product listing** to customize the appearance of product cards.

## Product card images

***

Change the **shape (aspect ratio)** of the product images, and enable a **secondary image on hover**.

<table><thead><tr><th width="176">Setting</th><th width="355">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show second image on hover</mark></td><td>Display the second product image when a cursor hovers over a product card.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Make product images consistent by cropping them to a square or rectangular shape. Select Natural to maintain their original shape without cropping.</td><td><strong>Natural</strong><br><strong>Portrait (2:3)</strong><br><strong>Portrait (4:5)</strong><br><strong>Square (1:1)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (5:4)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (3:2)</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Product card details

***

Choose to show vendor names, swatches, and product ratings.

### Show vendor

***

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="338">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show vendor</mark></td><td>Show vendor names on product cards.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show swatches

***

Go to **Theme settings > Swatches** to show swatches on product listings.

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="373">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable product listing swatches</mark></td><td>Show product variant swatches on hover.<br><br>Go to Theme settings to <a href="/pages/XeP1NCniPgMwEdnnBXop">set up swatches</a>.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Show product ratings

***

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="368">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show product ratings</mark></td><td>If you have a product reviews app, display ratings with either stars, the number of reviews, or both.</td><td><p><strong>Rating &#x26; Count</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></p><p><strong>Rating</strong></p><p><strong>Count</strong></p></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Sale and sold out badges

## Sale badge

***

When you set sale prices in your Shopify admin, you can display a **Sale badge** on products with a "sale" or discount message.

{% hint style="success" %}
Discounts and inventory are Shopify features. Learn about [Setting sale prices](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/discounts/sales) and [Managing inventory](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/inventory) on Shopify.
{% endhint %}

shows when a **Compare at price** is added in the Shopify admin.

`Go to Theme settings > Product badges to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show sale badge</mark></td><td>Show sale badge on products with a 'compare at price' that's higher than the current price.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Sale badge format</mark></td><td>Display discounts as a percentage or dollar value, or simply show a "Sale" text label.</td><td><strong>Sale</strong><br><strong>20% off</strong><br><strong>-20%</strong><br><strong>Save 20%</strong><br><strong>$5 off</strong><br><strong>-$5</strong><br><strong>Save $5</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Sold out badge

***

The **Sold out** badges show when a product's inventory is zero.

<table><thead><tr><th width="205">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show sold out badge</mark></td><td>Display 'Sold out' badge on products with zero inventory.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Product badges

{% columns %}
{% column width="83.33333333333334%" %}
**Product badges** are labels that appear on listed products that are on **Sale**, **Sold out**, or you can add **Custom** badges.

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:$info;"><strong>Why are custom badges not showing?</strong></mark></summary>

Make sure the badge tags match the exact spelling of the product tags in your Shopify admin. Also, check that the **Show custom badges** option is enabled in *Theme settings > Product listing*.

</details>
{% endcolumn %}

{% column width="16.666666666666657%" %}

{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}

<h2 align="center">Show badges on product listings</h2>

***

Sale, sold out, and custom badges are enabled by default. You can toggle off badges in theme settings.

<sub><mark style="color:$info;">Go to Theme settings > Product listing to find settings<mark style="color:$info;"></sub>

<table><thead><tr><th width="263">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show sale badge</mark></td><td>Show sale badge on products with a 'compare at price' that's higher than the current price.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show sold out badge</mark></td><td>Display 'Sold out' badge on products with zero inventory.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show custom badges</mark></td><td>Display discounts as a percentage or dollar value, or simply show a "Sale" text label.</td></tr></tbody></table>

<h2 align="center">Sale badge</h2>

***

When you set sale prices in your Shopify admin, products will display a **Sale badge** with a "sale" or discount message.

{% hint style="success" %}
Product discounts is a Shopify feature. Learn about [Setting sale prices](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/discounts/sales) and [Managing inventory](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/inventory) on Shopify.
{% endhint %}

<sub><mark style="color:$info;">Go to Theme settings > Product badges to find settings<mark style="color:$info;"></sub>

<table><thead><tr><th width="178">Setting</th><th width="378">Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background</mark></td><td>Set the color of the badge background.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Set the color of the badge label.</td></tr></tbody></table>

<h2 align="center">Sold out badges</h2>

***

When products are out-of-stock, products will display a "Sold out" badge. To disable sale or sold-out badges, click **Theme settings** and open the Product listing tab.

{% hint style="success" %}
Product inventory is a Shopify feature. Learn about [Managing inventory](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/inventory) on Shopify.
{% endhint %}

<sub><mark style="color:$info;">Go to Theme settings > Product badges to find settings<mark style="color:$info;"></sub>

<table><thead><tr><th width="199">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background</mark></td><td>Set the color of the badge background.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Tex</mark></td><td>Set the color of the "sold out" message.</td></tr></tbody></table>

<h2 align="center">Custom badges</h2>

***

Add up to 4 badges with custom messages and colors to display on specific products.

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
In **theme settings > product badges**, enter words in **Badge tags** want to display as a badge (e.g. "Limited edition").

> Use the color selector to change the **Badge color**.
> {% endstep %}

{% step %}
In your **Shopify admin**, add tags to your products using the exact same words.

> Learn more about [creating and using tags](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/shopify-admin/productivity-tools/using-tags) on Shopify.\
> \
> To use badge colors for multiple tags, enter the tags in a comma-separated list. For example: `Best seller, New, Special`.
> {% endstep %}
> {% endstepper %}

<sub><mark style="color:$info;">Go to Theme settings > Product badges to find settings<mark style="color:$info;"></sub>

<table><thead><tr><th width="205">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Badge tags</mark></td><td>Enter the words to display as the product badge.<br><br>For badges to appear, badge tags must match the product tags entered in your Shopify admin.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Background</mark></td><td>Set the color of the badge background.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text</mark></td><td>Set the color of the badge label.</td></tr></tbody></table>

### <mark style="color:$primary;">Translate custom badges</mark>

You can use **Metaobjects** and Shopify's [Translate & Adapt](https://apps.shopify.com/translate-and-adapt) app to translate custom badge labels. There are three general steps:

{% stepper %}
{% step %}
Add a new **Metaobject** with a field for each badge label
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Add the default language text for each label as **Entries**
{% endstep %}

{% step %}
Use Shopify's **Translate & Adapt** app to translate the default label text.
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

**1. Add Metaobject with custom badge names**

In the Shopify admin:

1. Go to **Content > Metaobjects**.
2. Click **Add definition**.
3. Enter `Custom badges` in the metaobject Name field.

   > This name must match exactly.
4. Under **Fields**, click **Add field**.
5. Select **Single line text**.
6. Enter the badge label in the **Name** field.

   > The name must exactly match the badge label.

   <figure><img src="/files/Ky58g4qtZ9OLKPJll1VX" alt="" width="511"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
7. (*Required*) Uncheck **Use this field as display name**.
8. Click **Add**.
9. **Repeat steps 4 to 8 for every badge label.**
10. Click **Save**.

**2. Add Entries for badge labels in default language**

1. Go to **Content > Metaobjects**.
2. Click on the **Custom badges** definition
3. Click **Add entry**.
4. Enter the same name of each custom badge label.

   > Enter the exact name to match the field label. This text will be the label text for the default language.

   <figure><img src="/files/jhf7UPBAPerZKUbhrLlp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
5. Under **Handle**, click **Edit**.
6. Enter `custom_badges_translations` as the entry's unique identifier.

   <figure><img src="/files/6NrZE68FLMEhAoYV4MEP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
7. Click **Save**.

**3. Use Translate & Adapt to add translations**

1. Go to **Apps > Translate & Adapt**.

   > If you haven't already, go to [Translate & Adapt](https://apps.shopify.com/translate-and-adapt) on the app store and click **Install**.
2. Under **Products**, click **Metaobjects**.
3. Enter translations for each custom badge label.\\

   <figure><img src="/files/W9uNreMx85JjIDtGz7nf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
4. Click **Save**.

</details>


# Prices and currencies

In **Theme settings > Currency format**, customize how prices are displayed on products.

## Currency codes

***

Choose to display currency codes next product prices.

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show currency codes on products</mark></td><td>Show the three-letter country currency code next to product prices.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show currency codes on cart totals</mark></td><td>Show the three-letter country currency code next to cart totals.</td><td><ul class="contains-task-list"><li><input type="checkbox"><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Prices

***

For products that are **sold out** or have a **$0 price**, you can choose to hide the price or show custom text instead.

Go to **Theme settings > Currency format** to find the settings.

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">$0 prices</mark></td><td>Choose how to display "$0" prices. You can hide "$0" prices or replace them with a custom label.<br><br>Use the default theme content editor to add your custom label in the "zero price" field.</td><td><p><strong>Show as '$0'</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></p><p><strong>Show as custom label</strong></p><p><strong>Hidden</strong></p></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Sold-out prices</mark></td><td>Choose how to display prices for sold-out products. You can hide prices for all sold-out products or replace them with a custom label.<br><br>Use the default theme content editor to add your custom label in the "sold out price" field.</td><td><p><strong>Show as price</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></p><p><strong>Show as custom label</strong></p><p><strong>Hidden</strong></p></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add custom label for prices

***

By default, **$0 prices** use "Free" and **sold-out prices** use "Sold out" as custom labels. You can change these labels in your default theme content editor.

{% hint style="warning" %}
You can only access the **default theme content editor** for purchased themes on Shopify.
{% endhint %}

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

In the theme editor (**Customize**):

1. Go to **Theme settings > Product listing** and scroll down to **Prices**.

   > For price display options on the product page, go to **Theme settings > Product**.
2. Click the dropdown for **$0 prices** or **Sold out prices**, and select **Show as custom label**.
3. Click the **Actions** **`...`** menu at the top of the theme editor.

   > You can also open the Actions menu next to your theme in the **Online store** section of your Shopify admin.
4. Select **Edit default theme content**.

   > **Note**: You can only access the **default theme content editor** for purchased themes on Shopify.
5. Click **Products** and scroll down to the **Inventory** section.
6. Change the text in the fields for **Sold out price custom label** or **Zero price custom label**.
7. Click **Save**.

</details>


# Swatches

Variant options

Display your product variants as **Swatches** to make it easy for customers to view your product options at a glance.

<figure><img src="/files/xB0F4boaI704Xu4IWUnI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Why are my swatches blank?</strong></mark></summary>

If your swatches appear blank, make sure that you are using an existing default color or that your image files and custom swatch names match your variant names. You may also need to add custom swatches for multiple languages.

</details>

## **Enable swatches**

***

Swatches are enabled in your theme settings by adding the option name for your variants.

1. Go to **Theme settings > Swatches**.
2. Enter the exact name of the product options that you want to display as swatches (e.g., 'Color'). Enter multiple option names as a comma-separated list.
3. Click **Save**.

<figure><img src="/files/57oquEftoFrC7tLFDu0E" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Set up swatch colors

***

You can add swatches using **default colors** or **custom colors** added to your theme settings. You can also **upload custom images** to represent your product variants more precisely.

[Use default colors for swatches](/eclipse/products/swatches/use-default-colors)

[Use custom colors for swatches](/eclipse/products/swatches/use-custom-colors)

[Upload custom images for swatches](/eclipse/products/swatches/use-custom-images)

## Swatch options

***

Go to **Theme settings > Swatches** to change how swatches appear across your store.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Show product listing swatches</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/x01s1vsbkaTmrz5vMCTM#show-swatches">/pages/x01s1vsbkaTmrz5vMCTM#show-swatches</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Show product filter swatches</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/0vzTP0Stl3Zu9uSeRacx#show-product-filter-swatches">/pages/0vzTP0Stl3Zu9uSeRacx#show-product-filter-swatches</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Change product page swatch size</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA#swatches">/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA#swatches</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Use default colors

Find a color you want to use on this list of [140 default web colors](https://htmlcolorcodes.com/color-names/), then enter that exact color name as the **Option value** for a product variant in your Shopify admin.

{% hint style="warning" %}
These default color names will appear on your product pages and in the cart. In order to choose your own product variant name or different color, you will need to use a custom web color.
{% endhint %}

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

In your **Shopify admin**:

1. Go to your **Products** to click the product you want to edit.
2. Under **Variants**, click **Add options like size and color** checkbox if you're adding variants for the first time.
3. Add the **Option name** (e.g. "Color" or "Material").

   > Remember to add this option name in your **Theme settings** to enable swatches.

   > See Shopify's [Variants guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/variants) for more information about product options.
4. Enter the exact name of a [default color](https://htmlcolorcodes.com/color-names/) in the **Option values** field for your variant.

   > If your store uses multiple languages, you will need to use custom colors or images.
5. Click **Done**.
6. Click **Save**.

</details>


# Use custom colors

In **Theme settings > Swatches**, you can assign custom colors to product variants using a **hex code color** (e.g. `#00b300`). Custom colors will override any default colors.

* In the **Custom swatch colors** field, list up to 100 variant names followed by a colon and the hex code (e.g. “Green: #00b300”).
* If your store uses **multiple languages**, add each translated variants name on a separate line with the assigned hex code.

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Why are my swatches blank?</strong></mark></summary>

Make sure the variant names match the exact spelling from your Shopify admin. If your store uses **multiple languages**, add each translated variant name with the assigned custom hex code on separate lines.

</details>

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Why aren’t my collection pages loading?</strong></mark></summary>

Adding more than 100 custom swatch colors can cause a ‘500’ error on your store and stop collection pages from loading. Consider using Custom swatch images for larger sets of variant swatches.

</details>

### Watch video tutorial

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/VZrge6ecwIY>" %}

## Find color hex codes

***

To find the hex code for the color you want, you can use a [HTML color picker like this one](https://htmlcolorcodes.com/). When you choose your color, select and copy the six-character hex code, including the hashtag symbol.

## Add custom colors

***

In ***Theme settings > Swatches***, list variant names followed by a colon and the hex code (e.g. “Green: #00b300”). If you store uses multiple languages, add each translated variant name with the custom hex code on separate lines.

{% hint style="warning" %}
Adding more than 100 custom swatch colors can cause a ‘500’ error on your store and stop collection pages from loading. Consider using Custom swatch images for larger sets of variant swatches.
{% endhint %}

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

In your theme editor (**Customize**):

1. Click to open the **Theme settings**, then click **Swatches**.
2. In the **Custom swatch colors** field add the exact name of the **Option value** (e.g. the product variant "Green") followed by a colon and your hex code color (e.g. **`Green: #00b300`**).

   > To add more than one custom color, press the 'return' key to add each color on its own line.

   > For **sibling products**, use the **Option name** added to the metafield you created. See the sibling product swatches guide to learn more.
3. (*For multiple store languages*) Add the translated variant name for all languages, followed by a colon and the hex code.

   > For example, for stores that use English and German, add custom colors for both **`Green`** and **`Grün`** on separate lines.
4. Click **Save**.

</details>


# Use custom images

Using custom images for swatches is great for product variants that have patterns or textures. Custom swatch images require image file names and variant names that match, which we will cover below.

Adding custom swatches images involves two general steps: **(1) Create and upload your custom swatch images** and **(2) Set up your product variants with matching names**.

## 1. Create and upload custom swatch images

***

For each product variant, you need to create a PNG image by screenshotting or cropping your product images. Each swatch image needs a file name that matches the variant name in your product options.

{% hint style="info" %}
**File names must be in lowercase and use hyphens instead of spaces. If your variant name has special characters (e.g. \* or &), replace them with hyphens.**

For example, if the product variant is called "Sea Blue & Red", the swatch image file must be named **`sea-blue-red.png`**.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="warning" %}
If your store uses **multiple languages**, make sure to upload swatch images with file names that match the translated name of your product variants, for each language.

For example, if your store uses English and German, you need two swatch image files for the default variant name (**`yellow.png`**) and the translated name (**`gelb.png`**).
{% endhint %}

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

1. You can create PNG image files by taking a **screenshot** (step 2) or **cropping** your product images (step 3).

   > We recommend images with minimum length or width of **70px**.
2. **Screenshots**: Use the **built-in screenshot tool** on your computer to capture swatches from your existing product images:

   > **Windows:** [How to use Windows Snipping Tool](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/use-snipping-tool-to-capture-screenshots-00246869-1843-655f-f220-97299b865f6b)

   > **Mac:** [Take a screenshots on your Mac](https://support.apple.com/en-us/HT201361)
3. **Cropped images**: Alternatively, **crop** a section of your product photo with a photo editing application (like Preview or Photoshop).

   > **Windows:** [How to Crop Images on Windows](https://www.windowscentral.com/how-crop-image-windows-10)

   > **Mac:** [How to crop an image in Preview on Mac](https://www.idownloadblog.com/2016/01/18/quickly-crop-image-preview-mac/)
4. Save your images as PNG files with a file name that matches the variant name. **File names must be in lowercase and use hyphens instead of spaces. Add image files for each store language matching the translated variant name.**

   \
   For all image files, use lowercase only (no capitals):

   | Variant name | File name |
   | ------------ | --------- |
   | Gray         | gray.png  |
   | Green        | green.png |

   \
   For variants with multiple words, use hyphens **`-`** instead of spaces:

   | Variant name | File name        |
   | ------------ | ---------------- |
   | Sea Blue     | sea-blue.png     |
   | Red and Blue | red-and-blue.png |

   \
   For multiple languages, add image files for each language with the translated names of the product variant:

   | Language | Variant name | File name   |
   | -------- | ------------ | ----------- |
   | English  | Yellow       | yellow\.png |
   | German   | Gelb         | gelb.png    |
   | French   | Jaune        | jaune.png   |
5. Once you have renamed your swatch images, go to **Content > Files** in your Shopify admin.
6. Click the **Upload files** button in the top-right corner and add all your swatch image files. You can select multiple files at once.
7. Go to Step two: **Set up your product variants**.

</details>

## 2. Set up product variants

***

Once you've uploaded your images, you need to set up your product variants with names that match the file names of your swatch images.

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>STEPS</strong></mark></summary>

In your **Shopify admin**:

1. Go to **Products** and click the product you want to edit.
2. Under **Variants**, click **Add options like size and color** checkbox if you're adding variants for the first time.
3. Add the **Option name** (e.g. "Color" or "Material").

   > Remember to add this option name in your **Theme settings** to enable swatches.

   > See Shopify's [Variants guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/variants) for more information about product options.
4. Add the **Option values** (product variants) with a name that corresponds to the correct swatch image file.

   > For example, if you've uploaded **`dark-blue.png`** as a swatch image, the product variant must be named **`Dark Blue`**.

   > If your store uses multiple languages, add the translated variant names using [Shopify's Translate & Adapt](https://apps.shopify.com/translate-and-adapt) feature.

   | Variant name | File names                       |
   | ------------ | -------------------------------- |
   | Green        | yellow\.png, gelb.png, jaune.png |
   | Sea blue     | sea-blue.png                     |
   | Red and blue | red-and-blue.png                 |
5. Preview your store to confirm that the swatches now appear.

   > If the theme cannot locate a matching swatch image for a color variant, a *White* swatch is shown. In this case, make sure the file names match the variant name, use hyphens **`-`** instead of spaces, and are all lowercase (no capitals).
6. Click **Save**.

</details>


# Product page

Template

**Product templates** control the content, layout, and style of your product pages. In the theme editor, you can customize the product media, product overview, and overall page design.

> To modify how products appear in collections and sections, go to the [product listing options](/eclipse/products/product-listings) in your theme settings.

{% hint style="success" %}
Products are created and managed in your Shopify admin. To learn more, refer to [Shopify's Products manual](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products).
{% endhint %}

## Customize page style

***

Click the **Product overview** section to edit the page colors, spacing, and layout.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Color scheme</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#color-scheme</a></td><td><a href="/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6">/files/OZ4h4v0qfTnncw43MKk6</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section width</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-width</a></td><td><a href="/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt">/files/lMLsRWOpgxDLC0CvtnAt</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Section padding</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding">/pages/3wq6hFMr3k1BDOHIgjqZ#section-padding</a></td><td><a href="/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov">/files/3ddmAtuVNo9MtYTf38ov</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Sticky effect

***

The **Sticky effect** makes either the gallery or product details remain at the top of the screen when scrolling down. You may want to enable this option to keep the add-to-cart button visible or keep the product images visible.

* **Sticky gallery** only applies to thumbnail gallery layouts.
* **Sticky product details** applies when the gallery is longer than the product details.
* Select **No sticky effect** to disable this option.

## Media gallery

***

Click the Product overview section to customize the layout of your product media.

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Gallery layout</strong></mark></td><td>Change the layout, <strong>size</strong>, <strong>position</strong>, and <strong>shape</strong> of your images</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/xHSCxA4JXppUU1PTbj98">/pages/xHSCxA4JXppUU1PTbj98</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Media grouping</strong></mark></td><td>Reveal images for the selected variant only.</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/VH11cL5rsvxSCaLSYnbH">/pages/VH11cL5rsvxSCaLSYnbH</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Sticky add to cart

***

The **Sticky 'Add to cart'** allows customers to add a product directly to their cart anywhere on the product page. When the product form's add-to-cart button is not visible, the sticky bar appears at the bottom of the page with an add-to-cart button.

The sticky bar displays the product title, price, image, and variant. Next to the variant, visitors can click the 'Change' link to jump to the variant selectors in the product form.

Click the **Product overview** section to toggle the Sticky add to cart for Desktop and Mobile.

## Product overview blocks

***

The **Product overview** section contains all the blocks that make up your product form, including product details, variant selectors, buy buttons, and additional feature blocks.

### Default blocks

***

The **Product overview** includes blocks for product information and purchasing options. Click a block to find its settings.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Title</strong></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Vendor</strong></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>SKU</strong></td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Description</strong></mark></td><td><a href="/pages/uxw9wBof0eQyNvDNNiEh">Show as collapsible row</a></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/uxw9wBof0eQyNvDNNiEh">/pages/uxw9wBof0eQyNvDNNiEh</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Price</strong></mark></td><td><p><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG#show-discounts">Show discounts</a></p><p><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG#show-sale-and-sold-out-badges">Sale and sold out badges</a><br><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG#shop-pay-instalments-banner">Shop Pay Instalments</a></p></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG">/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Quantity selector</strong></td><td>Show or hide quantity label</td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Variant selector</strong></mark></td><td><p><a href="/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA#variant-selector-style">Choose selector style</a></p><p><a href="/pages/XeP1NCniPgMwEdnnBXop">Show swatches</a></p><p><a href="/pages/4uBlRVxwxgMywTAHMM51">Add info popup</a> (product guide)</p></td><td><a href="/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA">/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Buy buttons</strong></mark></td><td><p><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL#change-button-style">Choose button style</a></p><p><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL#dynamic-checkout-button">Show dynamic checkout buttons</a></p><p><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL#local-pickup-banner">Show pickup availability</a></p></td><td><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL">/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Content blocks

***

Add more blocks with custom content and features for your product page.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Collapsible row</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/JXwSFrWS5WBrWKjkJiXK">/pages/JXwSFrWS5WBrWKjkJiXK</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Complementary products</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/wKfSEZOr3mnW5sKVCczG">/pages/wKfSEZOr3mnW5sKVCczG</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom options</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/6I0nlgPMeAiZGNJXUWxg">/pages/6I0nlgPMeAiZGNJXUWxg</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Featured icon with text</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/Ug0RI0DCr5i244UFarCz">/pages/Ug0RI0DCr5i244UFarCz</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Icon with text</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/ykErZ4eoIOQjwRT4yOhb">/pages/ykErZ4eoIOQjwRT4yOhb</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Image</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/g0rogOOuSRCdVEa7prHv">/pages/g0rogOOuSRCdVEa7prHv</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Inventory status</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/7TyZyf4lqbCZOs5nL5kg">/pages/7TyZyf4lqbCZOs5nL5kg</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Popup</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/O9dOcoiSiVJSYwEonE0f">/pages/O9dOcoiSiVJSYwEonE0f</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Product rating</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/BsPF0lvW6wZkEzLm7NW3">/pages/BsPF0lvW6wZkEzLm7NW3</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Share icons</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/ymEUveqYE6JoZvpbGYx6">/pages/ymEUveqYE6JoZvpbGYx6</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Text</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/ifHgmaXAmEhxBJVGq9If">/pages/ifHgmaXAmEhxBJVGq9If</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom Liquid</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/zbbxSdlA7oVIq8PjG1Gq">/pages/zbbxSdlA7oVIq8PjG1Gq</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Product recommendations

***

Add a full [product recommendations section](/eclipse/product-pages/product-recommendations) to your product pages.


# Gift card product

On Gift card product pages, you can allow customers to send gift cards to a recipient's email on a scheduled date with an optional message.

## Set up gift card product

***

The **Recipient information form** appears on gift card product pages, so make sure you've set up a gift card product in your Shopify admin. Go **Products > Gift cards** to view or create a gift card product.

{% hint style="success" %} <mark style="color:green;">**Shopify**</mark> Gift card products are a Shopify feature. See their [Gift card guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/gift-card-products) to learn more, and contact [Shopify support](https://help.shopify.com/en/) for related questions.
{% endhint %}

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;">STEPS: Create gift card product</mark></summary>

In your **Shopify admin**:

1. Click **Products** > **Gift cards**.
2. Click **Add gift card product**.
3. Set up your product details, including a title, description, product media, and denominations. See Shopify's [Gift card guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/gift-card-products) to learn more.
4. Click **Save**.

</details>

### Enable gift recipient form

***

In the **Product overview** section settings, select the **Show recipient information form for gift cards** option.

<details>

<summary><mark style="color:blue;">STEPS</mark></summary>

In the theme editor (**Customize**):

1. Open the **Product template**.
2. Click the **Product overview** section to open the settings.
3. Under **Gift card**, select **Show recipient information form for gift cards**.
4. Click **Save**.

</details>


# Media gallery

The **Media gallery** displays product images and videos for Product pages and Featured products.

Change the position and layout of the gallery media, and change the size and shape of images and videos.

{% hint style="info" %}
To show images only for the selected variant, you can set up [media grouping](/eclipse/product-pages/media-gallery/media-grouping).
{% endhint %}

## Choose layout style

***

Display product media as a **grid**, **stacked** list, or show additional images as **thumbnails**.

<div><figure><img src="/files/H8h8yVtWmzc41mEEnkCr" alt="" width="188"><figcaption><p>Grid</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/V11H8sRyNy6MV53Tuzg0" alt="" width="100"><figcaption><p>Stacked</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/ccEYTSQ9ZhkyZl3Bihx3" alt="" width="188"><figcaption><p>Thumbnails left</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/KcHFuWOZz2TqQEMtq2Cj" alt="" width="188"><figcaption><p>Thumbnails bottom</p></figcaption></figure></div>

`Click Product overview or Featured product section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop gallery layout</mark></td><td>Choose how gallery media are displayed.</td><td><strong>Grid</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Stacked</strong><br><strong>Thumbnails below</strong><br><strong>Thumbnails left</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Thumbnail size</mark></td><td>Set the maximum size of thumbnail images in the gallery.</td><td><strong>50 - 100 px</strong><br><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 75</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Gallery position and size

***

Position the media gallery on the left or right side of the product details. You can increase the width of the gallery on the page.

`Click Product overview or Featured product section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="170">Setting</th><th width="422">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop media position</mark></td><td>Choose whether the media gallery appears on the left or right side of the product details.</td><td><strong>Left</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Right</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Desktop gallery size</mark></td><td>Set the maximum width of the media gallery. The product overview will adapt to the remaining width of the page.</td><td><p><strong>35 - 70%</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 55</mark></p></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Mobile gallery

***

Customize the media gallery for mobile screens.

`Click Product overview or Featured product section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Media size</mark></td><td>Set the size of product media on mobile devices.</td><td><strong>Full width</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Contained</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable slider looping</mark></td><td>Return to the first image after swiping through the last image.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Image aspect ratio

***

Make your product media a uniform shape or use their original proportions.

`Click Product overview or Featured product section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="159">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Aspect ratio</mark></td><td>Select an <strong>aspect ratio</strong> to crop images to be a uniform shape, or select <strong>Natural</strong> to display images in their original shape.</td><td><strong>Natural</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Portrait (2:3)</strong><br><strong>Portrait (4:5)</strong><br><strong>Square (1:1)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (5:4)</strong><br><strong>Landscape (3:2)</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Enable autoplay videos

***

Choose to **autoplay and loop videos** in the product media gallery. Videos will be automatically muted and will not show controls.

1. Upload a `.mp4` or `.mov` video file to the product media in your Shopify admin.
2. Open the product template in your theme editor, then select **Enable autoplay videos**.

#### Requirements

***

For **autoplay videos**, make sure your video files meet the following requirements:

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th width="210"></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Video file type</strong></td><td><code>.mp4</code> or <code>.mov</code><br><br><em>Embedded YouTube or Vimeo videos are not supported</em>.</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video length</strong></td><td>1 minute (Recommended)</td></tr><tr><td><strong>Video size</strong></td><td>> 10MB (Recommended)</td></tr></tbody></table>

## Enable image zoom

***

Allow customers to zoom in on product images for a closer look.

`Click Product overview or Featured product section to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Enable image zoom</mark></td><td>When enabled, customers can click or hover over product images to see a zoomed-in view.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Media grouping

With **media grouping**, your product pages will show only the relevant media for the selected variant and hide the rest.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you want to show different product details as well as images, you may want to use [Sibling product swatches](/eclipse/product-pages/sibling-product-swatches), which links variants to their own product pages.
{% endhint %}

### Set up media groups

***

To create **media groups** for variants, first **re-order the product media for each of variant&#x20;*****in sequence***, so that they are grouped together and follow the same order as your product options. Then **assign the first image of each group to the related variant**.

{% hint style="info" %}
When selected, variants will display the assigned image and all following images up until the *next* variant's assigned image.
{% endhint %}

In your **Shopify admin**, go to **Products** to open the product you want to edit:

{% stepper %}
{% step %}

### Re-order product media in the same order as variants

Using the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`**, re-order your product media to **group together items for each variant.** The order of the groups should match the order of the variants.

> All media for the first variant should be in the top positions, followed by all media for the second variant, followed by all media for the third variant, etc.

![Images ordered for the color variants 'Purple', 'Green,' and 'Yellow'.](/files/lKVGptcGcP9z3n5TMxL3)
{% endstep %}

{% step %}

### Assign the first image of each group to variants

In the **Variants** section, click the **Add image** button next to each variant. Select the first image of the group related to that variant.

> If no image is assigned, the media gallery will not update and will continue to show images of the previously selected variant.

If your product has **multiple options**, assign the first image to each variant of that option.

> For example, if your product has both color and size options, assign the first group image to variants with the same color.

<div><img src="/files/oVeOyrEblvGr573xGRxX" alt="Assign the first group image to the related variant." width="375"> <figure><img src="/files/2xBhW6Oh9EzHwRopJIQE" alt="" width="375"><figcaption><p>For multiple product options, assign the first group image to each related variant.</p></figcaption></figure></div>
{% endstep %}
{% endstepper %}

### Enable media grouping

***

After you've set up media groups for your variant images, you can enable media grouping in the **Product overview** settings of your product template.

In your theme editor (**Customize**):

1. Open the product template.
2. Click the **Product overview** section.
3. Toggle on **Enable media grouping** option.
4. Click **Save**.


# Product overview blocks

The **Product overview** section contains all the blocks that make up your product form, including product information, variant selectors, buy buttons, and additional feature blocks.

<h2 align="center">Default blocks</h2>

***

The **Product overview** consists of essential product information and purchasing options. Click a block to find its settings.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Title</strong></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Vendor</strong></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td><strong>SKU</strong></td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Description</strong></td><td><a href="/pages/uxw9wBof0eQyNvDNNiEh">Show as collapsible row</a></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/uxw9wBof0eQyNvDNNiEh">/pages/uxw9wBof0eQyNvDNNiEh</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Price</strong></td><td><p><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG#show-discounts">Show discounts</a></p><p><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG#show-sale-and-sold-out-badges">Sale and sold out badges</a><br><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG#shop-pay-instalments-banner">Shop Pay Instalments</a></p></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG">/pages/owNdA6drNyY8S3NShhdG</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Quantity selector</strong></td><td>Show or hide quantity label</td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

<table data-card-size="large" data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><strong>Variant selector</strong></td><td><p><a href="/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA#variant-selector-style">Choose selector style</a></p><p><a href="/pages/XeP1NCniPgMwEdnnBXop">Show swatches</a></p><p><a href="/pages/4uBlRVxwxgMywTAHMM51">Add info popup</a> (product guide)</p></td><td><a href="/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA">/pages/5TuK6lgxJb5c1H2WD2FA</a></td></tr><tr><td><strong>Buy buttons</strong></td><td><p><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL#change-button-style">Choose button style</a></p><p><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL#dynamic-checkout-button">Show dynamic checkout buttons</a></p><p><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL#local-pickup-banner">Show pickup availability</a></p></td><td><a href="/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL">/pages/1CS5FY9RBOnUjMR3qRzL</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

<h2 align="center">Content blocks</h2>

***

Add more blocks with custom content and features for your product page.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Badges</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/ZFD0vQisguZdOKn9q63U">/pages/ZFD0vQisguZdOKn9q63U</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Collapsible row</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/JXwSFrWS5WBrWKjkJiXK">/pages/JXwSFrWS5WBrWKjkJiXK</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Complementary products</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/wKfSEZOr3mnW5sKVCczG">/pages/wKfSEZOr3mnW5sKVCczG</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom options</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/6I0nlgPMeAiZGNJXUWxg">/pages/6I0nlgPMeAiZGNJXUWxg</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Featured icon with text</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/Ug0RI0DCr5i244UFarCz">/pages/Ug0RI0DCr5i244UFarCz</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Icon with text</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/ykErZ4eoIOQjwRT4yOhb">/pages/ykErZ4eoIOQjwRT4yOhb</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Image</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/g0rogOOuSRCdVEa7prHv">/pages/g0rogOOuSRCdVEa7prHv</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Inventory status</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/7TyZyf4lqbCZOs5nL5kg">/pages/7TyZyf4lqbCZOs5nL5kg</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Popup</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/O9dOcoiSiVJSYwEonE0f">/pages/O9dOcoiSiVJSYwEonE0f</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Product rating</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/BsPF0lvW6wZkEzLm7NW3">/pages/BsPF0lvW6wZkEzLm7NW3</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Share icons</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/ymEUveqYE6JoZvpbGYx6">/pages/ymEUveqYE6JoZvpbGYx6</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Text</strong></mark></td><td>Description.</td><td><a href="/pages/ifHgmaXAmEhxBJVGq9If">/pages/ifHgmaXAmEhxBJVGq9If</a></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;"><strong>Custom Liquid</strong></mark></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/zbbxSdlA7oVIq8PjG1Gq">/pages/zbbxSdlA7oVIq8PjG1Gq</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

<h2 align="center">Add layout blocks</h2>

***

Use the **Divider** and **Spacer** blocks to add a border line and extra spacing between blocks.

### <mark style="color:$primary;">Divider block</mark>

<sub><mark style="color:$info;">Click Divider block to find settings<mark style="color:$info;"></sub>

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Bottom padding</mark></td><td>Add spacing below the border line.</td><td><strong>1-50</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 36</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>

### <mark style="color:$primary;">Spacer block</mark>

<sub><mark style="color:$info;">Click Spacer block to find settings<mark style="color:$info;"></sub>

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Space</mark></td><td>Add spacing between two blocks.</td><td><strong>1-100</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 30</mark></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Description

The **Description** block displays the product description as added in your Shopify admin.

{% hint style="success" %}
Product descriptions are added in the Shopify admin. Themes cannot modify product descriptions. See [Shopify's product guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/products/details#title-and-description) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

## Set up description block

***

Change the **title** and **text size** of the description block, then choose to display the description as a **collapsible row**.

`Click Description block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Title</mark></td><td>Enter text to display as a heading.</td><td><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default: Description</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Text size</mark></td><td>Change the text size of the description text.</td><td><strong>Small</strong><br><strong>Medium</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>Large</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Display as collapsible row</mark></td><td>Show an expandable title that reveals the description when clicked.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Expand by default</mark></td><td>Display the collapsible row as open with the description revealed.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add bottom padding

***

Use **Bottom padding** to adjust the layout of the product overview section by adding spacing between blocks.

Bottom padding will not apply when another collapsible row is positioned below.

`Click Description block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Bottom padding</mark></td><td>Add spacing below the block</td><td><p><strong>1 - 50px</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 36px</mark></p></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Price

The **price block** displays the product price, discounts, and sale and sold-out badges. You can also enable the Shop pay instalments banner.

## Show discounts

***

If your products have a 'compare-at price', you can display the discount as a percentage or curreny amount off, or show a 'Sale' badge.

`Click Price block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="191">Setting</th><th width="363">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show discount</mark></td><td>Show discount amount as set up in the 'compare at price' setting in the Shopify admin.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Discount format</mark></td><td>Display discounts as percentage or currency amount.</td><td><strong>Sale</strong><br><strong>20% off</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><br><strong>-20%</strong><br><strong>Save 20%</strong><br><strong>$5 off</strong><br><strong>-$5</strong><br><strong>Save $5</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Shop pay instalments banner

***

If you have Shopify's Shop Pay enabled, you can allow customers to pay in instalments. Choose to display the Shop Pay banner below the price.

<table><thead><tr><th width="277">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show Shop Pay Instalments banner</mark></td><td>Show Shop Pay instalments banner.<br><br>To display the banner, Shop Pay must be enabled for your store. <a href="https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/payments/shop-pay-installments">Learn more</a></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Show sale and sold out badges

***

The **Sale badge** shows when a **Compare at price** is added in the Shopify admin. The **Sold out badge** shows when a product's inventory is zero.

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show sale badge</mark></td><td>Display a sale badge on products with a 'compare at price' that's higher than the current price.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show sold out badge</mark></td><td>Display a 'Sold out' badge on products with zero inventory.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Alignment</mark></td><td>Set position of sale and sold out badges.</td><td><strong>Above price</strong><br><strong>Left of price</strong><br><strong>Right of price</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Sale badge format</mark></td><td>Choose how to display discounts for sale badges. Show the discount as a percentage or dollar value, or simply show a "Sale" text label.</td><td><strong>Sale</strong><br><strong>20% off</strong><br><strong>-20%</strong><br><strong>Save 20%</strong><br><strong>$5 off</strong><br><strong>-$5</strong><br><strong>Save $5</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Buy buttons

The **Buy button** block shows the "Add to cart" button with an optional dynamic checkout button.

### Change button style

***

Change the buy button style to **Solid** or **Outline.** Click the **Buy buttons** block to open the settings and change the **"Add to cart" button style.**

### **Sticky add-to-cart**

***

### Dynamic checkout button

***

The **Dynamic checkout button** lets customers quickly buy the product they're viewing with a "Buy it now" button that skips directly to the cart or a branded button with the customer's preferred payment method.

To enable this option, click on the **Buy buttons** block to access its settings and check the **Show dynamic checkout buttons** checkbox.

{% hint style="success" %}
The Dynamic checkout button is a Shopify feature. The theme includes an option to enable the dynamic checkout button, but settings, icons, and functionality are controlled by Shopify. See Shopify's [Dynamic checkout button guide here](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/online-store/dynamic-checkout).
{% endhint %}

### Local pickup banner

***

If you've set up local pickup in your Shopify admin, the theme automatically displays a banner below the buy buttons that tells customers whether the product is available at your location.

{% hint style="success" %}
Local pickup is a Shopify feature and is not controlled by the theme. See [Shopify's Local pickup guide](https://help.shopify.com/en/manual/sell-in-person/shopify-pos/order-management/local-pickup-for-online-orders) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

`Click Buy buttons block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Add to cart button style</mark></td><td>Change the appearance of the buy button.</td><td><strong>Solid</strong><br><strong>Outline</strong> <em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show dynamic checkout buttons</mark></td><td>Show "Buy it now" button with the returning customer's preferred checkout method.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show pickup availability</mark></td><td>Show banner with availability at your local stores.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add bottom padding

***

Use **Bottom padding** to adjust the layout of the product overview section by adding spacing between blocks.

`Click Buy buttons block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Bottom padding</mark></td><td>Add spacing below the block</td><td><p><strong>1 - 50px</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 36px</mark></p></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Badges

Add the **Badges** block to show the sale, sold out, and custom badges. Badges colors and custom labels can be customized in [Theme settings > Product badges](/eclipse/products/product-badges).

<sub><mark style="color:$info;">Go to Theme settings > Product listing to find settings<mark style="color:$info;"></sub>

<table><thead><tr><th width="263">Setting</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show sale badge</mark></td><td>Show sale badge on products with a 'compare at price' that's higher than the current price.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show sold out badge</mark></td><td>Display 'Sold out' badge on products with zero inventory.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show custom badges</mark></td><td>Display discounts as a percentage or dollar value, or simply show a "Sale" text label.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Sale badge format</mark></td><td>Display discounts as a percentage or dollar value, or simply show a "Sale" text label.</td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Bottom padding</mark></td><td>Set the amount of space below the badge block.</td></tr></tbody></table>


# Collapsible row

**Collapsible row blocks** reveal additional text when opened. Use these blocks to organize product details and extra information.

<figure><img src="/files/mqsaAQOEY3HXQWYTlQUw" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Add collapsible row blocks

***

Under **Product overview**, click **(+) Add block** and select **Collapsible row**. Use the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks. Click a row block to start adding content.

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing a template will change all pages that use that template**.

[Create and assign new templates](https://github.com/fluorescent/kb-horizon/tree/main/product-pages/pages/editing-page-templates/create-and-assign-new-templates.md) to design different page layouts.

[Add dynamic content](https://github.com/fluorescent/kb-horizon/tree/main/product-pages/pages/editing-page-templates/dynamic-content-with-metafields.md) to show page-specific content in the same template.
{% endhint %}

`Click Collapsible row block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Expand by default</mark></td><td>Show row as already opened with the text revealed.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>The title of the row.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: Collapsible row</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Content</mark></td><td>Add text that's revealed when the row is opened. Use the buttons to make the text bold or italicized, or to add a link.</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Page for content</mark></td><td>Display content from a page create in your Shopify admin. This option is useful for creating and displaying tables (for product guides).</td><td></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Custom liquid</mark></td><td><p>Add custom Liquid code for apps or custom content.</p><p>See Shopify's <a href="https://shopify.dev/docs/api/liquid">Liquid reference guide</a> and <a href="https://shopify.github.io/liquid-code-examples/">Liquid code examples</a> to learn more.</p></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add bottom padding

***

Use **Bottom padding** to adjust the layout of the product overview section by adding spacing between blocks.

Bottom padding does not apply when another collapsible row is positioned below.

`Click Collapsible block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="400">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Bottom padding</mark></td><td>Add spacing below the block</td><td><p><strong>1 - 50px</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 48px</mark></p></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Complementary products

The **Complementary products** block displays recommended products that pair well with the main product.

* Change the **heading** text
* Choose to show recommendations from a **collection** or a **custom list of products**.
* Choose how many product recommendations to show

<figure><img src="/files/aGdspDCQnA0y9kZpUL2p" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Add complementary products

***

Under **Product overview**, click **(+) Add block** and select **Complementary products**. Use the drag-and-drop handles **`⋮⋮`** to re-order blocks. Click the block to start customizing.

{% hint style="warning" %}
**Editing a template will change all pages that use that template**.

[Create and assign new templates](/eclipse/pages/templates/using-templates) to design different page layouts.

[Add dynamic content](/eclipse/general/editing-themes/dynamic-content-with-metafields) to show page-specific content in the same template.
{% endhint %}

### Select source for recommendations

***

`Click Complementary products block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="239">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Recommendations to show</mark></td><td>Choose the source of product recommendations for cross-sells.</td><td><strong>From product list</strong><br><strong>Search &#x26; Discovery app recommendations</strong></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Max number of products to show</mark></td><td>Set the maximum number of recommended products.</td><td><strong>3 - 9</strong></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Customize appearance

***

Change the **heading** text and choose whether to show **product images**.

`Click Complementary products block to find settings`

<table><thead><tr><th width="190">Setting</th><th width="287">Description</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Heading</mark></td><td>Enter a title for the complementary products block.</td><td><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: "Pairs well with"</mark></td></tr><tr><td><mark style="color:blue;">Show product thumbnails</mark></td><td>Show product images next to the product title and price.</td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>

### Add bottom padding

***

Use **Bottom padding** to adjust the layout of the product overview section by adding spacing between blocks.

`Click Complementary products block to find settings`

| Setting                                         | Description                 | Options                                                                                                                                                   |
| ----------------------------------------------- | --------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| <mark style="color:blue;">Bottom padding</mark> | Add spacing below the block | <p><strong>1 - 50px</strong></p><p><em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Default</mark></em><mark style="background-color:yellow;">: 36px</mark></p> |




---

[Next Page](/llms-full.txt/1)

